Copyright: © 1998 Visio Corporation. All rights reserved.
Citation: IntelliCAD 98 Online Help © 1998 Visio Corporation. All rights reserved.


IntelliCAD Commands

Click a letter to go to that section.

#

3D Array	3DARRAY	Creates multiple copies of entities in three dimensions.
3D Entities	3D	Draws three-dimensional surface primitives: box, cone, cylinder, dish, dome, mesh, sphere, pyramid, torus, and wedge.
3D Polyline	3DPOLY	Draws a three-dimensional polyline with straight segments.
A

About	ABOUT	Displays the About IntelliCAD dialog box, which contains version and registration information.
Arc	ARC	Draws an arc of any size.
Area	AREA	Calculates the area of entities or calculates defined areas.
Array	ARRAY	Creates multiple copies of entities in either a rectangular (rows and columns) pattern or a polar (circular) pattern.
Attribute Definition	ATTDEF	Creates an Attribute Definition entity for informational text that you want associated with a block definition.
Attribute Display	ATTDISP	Shows all attributes, none, or those normally visible.
Attribute Extract	ATTEXT	Extracts attribute data from a drawing.
B

Backgrounds	BACKGROUNDS	Creates a backdrop for your model when you render it using the Full Render command.
Base Point	BASE	Sets the base point for inserting this drawing into another drawing.
Block	BLOCK	Forms a single compound entity from a group of entities.
Box	BOX	Draws a three-dimensional box.
Break	BREAK	Erases part of an entity, or splits an entity into two entities.
C

Calculator	CAL	Displays the standard Windows Calculator.
Center Snap	CENTER	Toggles the Center snap on or off.
Chamfer	CHAMFER	Creates a chamfer, or beveled edges, at the intersection of two lines.
Change	CHANGE	Changes the location, size, color, elevation, layer, linetype, linetype scale, and thickness of selected entities.
Change Properties	CHPROP	Changes the properties of selected entities.
Circle	CIRCLE	Draws a circle of any size.
Clear Entity Snaps	NONE	Turns all Entity Snaps off.
Close Drawing	CLOSE	Closes the active drawing window without exiting the program.
Color	COLOR	Establishes the color for all entities that you draw after you select the command.
Command Bar	CMDBAR	Turns the command bar on and off; when on, this command positions the command bar.
Cone	CONE	Draws a three-dimensional cone.
Coons Surface	EDGESURF	Draws a three-dimensional polygon mesh with vertices averaged between four edges.
Coordinate	COORDINATE	Changes the coordinate display on the status line: on, off, and relative coordinates.
Copy Entity	COPY	Draws a duplicate of the selected entities.
Copy Entity Data	COPYEDATA	Copies the entity data of the selected entities.
Copy Entity Formatting	MATCHPROP	Copies the properties from one entity to another.
Copy History	COPYHIST	Copies the text of the Prompt History window to the Windows Clipboard.
Copy to Clipboard	COPYCLIP	Copies the selection to the Windows Clipboard.
Customize	CUSTOMIZE	Displays the Customize dialog box.
Cut to Clipboard	CUTCLIP	Cuts (removes) the selection from your drawing and places it on the Windows Clipboard.
Cylinder	CYLINDER	Draws a three-dimensional cylinder.
D

Database List	DBLIST	Lists the database information for every entity in the current drawing.
Define Attributes	DDATTDEF	Displays the Define Attribute dialog box so you can define attributes (informational text) associated with a block.
Define View	DVIEW	Dynamically defines parallel or visual perspective views.
Delay	DELAY	Delays carrying outthe next command for a specified time.
Delete	DELETE	Deletes selected entities from your drawing.
Delete Entity Data	DELEDATA	Deletes Entity Data.
Dimension	DIMENSION	Places IntelliCAD in the dimension mode.
Dimension Aligned	DIMALIGNED	Adds dimensions that are aligned to entities.
Dimension Angular	DIMANGULAR	Annotates the angle between two selected entities.
Dimension Baseline	DIMBASELINE	Continues a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from a previous dimension.
Dimension Center Lines	DIMCENTER	Places a marker at the center of a circle or an arc.
Dimension Continue	DIMCONTINUE	Continues a dimension.
Dimension Diameter	DIMDIAMETER	Measures the diameter of a circle or an arc.
Dimension Edit	DIMEDIT	Edits dimension lines and text.
Dimension Leader	DIMLEADER	Draws a line, or sequence of lines, for controlled placement of dimension text.
Dimension Linear	DIMLINEAR	Adds horizontal or vertical dimensions to entities.
Dimension Ordinate	DIMORDINATE	Adds coordinate point dimensions.
Dimension Override	DIMOVERRIDE	Overrides the style settings for a given set of dimensions.
Dimension Radius	DIMRADIUS	Measures the radius of a circle or an arc.
Dimension Reposition Text	DIMTEDIT	Defines the position and angle of dimension text.
Dimension Rotated	DIMLINEAR	Adds horizontal and vertical dimensions to entities.
Dimension Settings	SETDIM	Displays the Dimension Settings dialog box so you can create and modify dimension styles.
Dimension Style	DIMSTYLE	Creates, changes, and saves dimension styles.
Dish	DISH	Draws a three-dimensional hemisphere.
Distance	DIST	Measures the distance and angle between two points.
Divide	DIVIDE	Places markers along a selected entity.
Dome	DOME	Draws a three-dimensional hemisphere.
Donut	DONUT OR DOUGHNUT	Draws a filled circle or flat ring created as a polyline.
Dragmode	DRAGMODE	Switches the dragged-entity display between on, off, and auto.
DXF In	DXFIN	Displays the Load DXF File dialog box so you can import a Drawing Interchange File.
DXF Out	DXFOUT	Displays the Select DXF File dialog box so you can export a Drawing Interchange File.
E

Edit Attribute	ATTEDIT	Edits the attribute text associated with blocks.
Edit Block Attributes	DDATTE	Displays the Edit Block Attributes dialog box so you can edit the attributes associated with a block.
Edit Entity Data	EDITEDATA	Edits the Extended Entity Data of an entity.
Edit Length	EDITLEN	Changes the length of an open-ended entity or the included angle of an arc.
Edit Polyline	EDITPLINE	Edits polyline entities.
Edit Text	DDEDIT	Modifies the properties of selected text entities.
Elevation	ELEVATION	Changes the elevation and thickness of future entities that you draw.
Ellipse	ELLIPSE	Draws ellipses.
Elliptical Arc	ELLIPSE	Draws elliptical arcs.
Endpoint Snap	ENDPOINT	Toggles the Endpoint snap on or off.
Entity Snap Percision	APERTURE	Sets the selection area for snapping to entities.
Entity Snap Settings	SETESNAP	Displays the Drawing Settings dialog box so you can change the Entity Snaps.
Entity Snaps	ESNAP	Locates points precisely on reference points of entities.
Exit	EXIT	Exits IntelliCAD.
Explode	EXPLODE	Ungroups a block, polyline, or hatch, creating separate entities for each element.
Explode	XPLODE	Ungroups a block, polyline, polyface mesh, solid, or hatch, creating separate entities for each element.
Explore Blocks	EXPBLOCKS	Displays the Drawing Explorer so you can view, create, copy, or edit blocks.
Explore Coordinate Systems	EXPUCS	Displays the Drawing Explorer so you can view, create, copy, or edit user coordinate systems definitions.
Explore Layers	EXPLAYERS	Displays the Drawing Explorer so you can view, create, copy, or edit layers.
Explore Linetypes	EXPLTYPES	Displays the Drawing Explorer so you can view, create, copy, or edit linetypes.
Explorer	EXPLORER	Displays the Drawing Explorer so you can view, create, copy, or edit layers, linetypes, blocks, text styles, views, and coordinate system definitions.
Explore Text Styles	EXPFONTS	Displays the Drawing Explorer so you can view, create, copy, or edit fonts.
Explore Views	EXPVIEWS	Displays the Drawing Explorer so you can view, create, or edit views.
Export	EXPORT	Displays the Export Drawing File As dialog box so you can export the drawing to a selected file type.
Extend	EXTEND	Lengthens a line, arc, or polyline to meet another entity.
External Reference	XREF	Temporarily adds external drawings to a current drawing, without changing their content.
Extract Attributes	DDATTEXT	Displays the Attribute Extract dialog box so you can extract attribute data (informational text) to a DXF or TXT file on disk.
Extruded Surface	TABSURF	Creates a polygon mesh approximating a general tabulated surface defined by a path and a direction vector.
F

Face	FACE	Draws a planar surface defined by three or four points.
Fill	FILL	Controls whether solids and wide polylines are automatically filled when displayed and output.
Fillet	FILLET	Constructs an arc between two lines, arcs, circles, infinite lines, rays, or polylines.
Filter	FILTER	Prompts you to select entities to include in the selection set.
Flatten	FLATTEN	Flattens three-dimensional entities to two dimensions.
Font	FONT	Creates or changes current text fonts (styles).
Freehand	FREEHAND	Draws a line entity using segments of a predetermined length.
Full Render	FULLRENDER	Creates a photorealistic image of your model, complete with light sources, shadows, surface material properties, and reflections.
G

Graphics Screen	GRAPHSCR	Switches between the Prompt History window and the drawing window.
Grid	GRID	Displays a grid of dots on the screen used for visual reference.
H

Hatch	HATCH	Performs crosshatching and pattern-filling of closed entities.
Help	HELP	Displays context-sensitive online Help for the current command.
Hide	HIDE	Regenerates a three-dimensional visualization with hidden lines removed.
I

ID Coordinates	IDPOINT	Displays the user coordinate system coordinates of a specified point.
Import	IMPORT	Displays the Open Drawing dialog box so you can import another drawing file into the current drawing.
Infinite Line	INFLINE	Draws an infinite line in both directions from a specified starting point.
Insert	INSERT	Inserts a copy of a previously drawn block entity into the current drawing.
Insert Block	DDINSERT	Displays the Insert dialog box so you can insert a block or another drawing into the current drawing.
Insert Object	INSERTOBJ	Displays the Insert Object dialog box so you can insert an ActiveX object into the drawing.
Insertion Point Snap	INSERTION	Toggles the Insertion snap on or off.
Intersection Snap	INTERSECTION	Toggles the Intersection snap on or off.
Isometric Plane	ISOPLANE	When the isometric grid is turned on, toggles the isometric plane between left, right, and top.
J

Join	JOIN	Joins two entities (two or more lines, or two or more arcs) into one entity.
L

Layer	LAYER	Creates named drawing layers and assigns color and linetype properties to those layers.
Lighting	LIGHTING	Defines light sources and effects that will illuminate your model when you render it using the Full Render command.
Limits	LIMITS	Changes the drawing boundaries and controls checking of those boundaries for the current space.
Line	LINE	Draws straight lines of any length.
Linetype	LINETYPE	Defines linetypes (sequences of alternating line segments, dots, and spaces), loads them from libraries, and sets the current linetype.
Linetype Scale	LTSCALE	Sets the scale factor you want applied to all linetypes within the drawing.
Links	OLELINKS	Lists, updates, and modifies linked objects within a drawing file.
List Entity Information	LIST	Lists the database information for selected entities.
Load Application	APPLOAD	Displays the Load Application Files dialog box so you can load LISP and SDS programs that do not automatically load.
Log File Name	LOGFILENAME	Names the file you want created when you use LOGFILEON to save information in the Prompt History window.
Log File Off	LOGFILEOFF	Closes the text file created with LOGFILEON.
Log File On	LOGFILEON	Writes all commands and prompts in the Prompt History window to a text file.
M

Mail	MAIL	Activates a mail program so you can send an IntelliCAD drawing file via electronic mail.
Make Snapshot	MSNAPSHOT	Displays the Snapshot to Create dialog box so you can create a slide file from the current display.
Marker Blips	BLIPMODE	Turns marker specification points on and off.
Materials	MATERIALS	Assigns material properties to entities, enhancing the visual appearance of the model when you render it with the Full Render command.
Measure	MEASURE	Places markers at specified intervals along a selected entity.
Menu	MENU	Displays the Open Menu dialog box so you can load menu files (.mnu).
Menu Load	MENULOAD	Displays the Customize dialog box so you can customize the current menu file.
Menu Unload	MENUUNLOAD	Displays the Customize dialog box so you can  unload partial menu files.
Midpoint Snap	MIDPOINT	Toggles the Midpoint snap on or off.
Mirror	MIRROR	Reflects entities through a line.
Mirror 3D	MIRROR3D	Reflects entities through a plane.
Model Space	MSPACE	Switches to model space.
Move	MOVE	Moves designated entities to another location in the same drawing.
Move Entity Data	MOVEEDATA	Moves entity data.
Multiline Text	MTEXT	Creates paragraph text.
Multiple	MULTIPLE	Repeats the next command until you cancel it.
Multiple Insert	MINSERT	Inserts multiple copies of a block in a rectangular pattern.
N

Nearest Snap	NEAREST	Toggles the Nearest snap on or off.
New Drawing	NEW	Creates a new drawing.
New Drawing Wizard	NEWWIZ	Displays the New Drawing Wizard, which allows you to create a new drawing.
O

Open Drawing	OPEN	Displays the Open Drawing dialog box so you can open an existing drawing.
Open External Drawing	OPENEXT	Loads a DWG file into memory without opening it in IntelliCAD.
Options	CONFIG	Displays the Options dialog box so you can specify the default settings (such as Experience Level, Axis Color, and Search Paths).
Orthogonal	ORTHOGONAL	Constrains the drawing so that you can enter only lines aligned with the grid.
P

Pan	PAN	Moves the display window.
Paper Space	PSPACE	Switches to paper space.
Paper Space Views	MVIEW	Creates and controls viewpoints.
Parallel	PARALLEL	Creates offset curves and parallel lines.
Paste from Clipboard	PASTECLIP	Pastes the contents of the Windows Clipboard into the current drawing.
Paste Special	PASTESPEC	Inserts data from the Windows Clipboard into the current drawing.
Perpendicular Snap	PERPENDICULAR	Toggles the Perpendicular snap on or off.
Plan View	PLAN	Places the display in plan view (V point 0,0,1) relative to either the current user coordinate system (UCS), a specified UCS, or the World Coordinate System.
Plan View Intersection Snap	PLANVIEWINT	Toggles the Plan View Intersection snap on or off.
Plane	PLANE	Draws a solid, two-dimensional surface.
Point	POINT	Draws single point entities.
Point Snap	NODE	Toggles the Point Snap on or off.
Polyface Mesh	PFACE	Creates a three-dimensional mesh of arbitrary complexity and surface characteristics.
Polygon	POLYGON	Draws polygons with a specified number of sides.
Polygon Mesh	MESH	Defines a three-dimensional polygon mesh by specifying its size (in terms of M and N) and the location of each vertex in the mesh.
Polyline	POLYLINE	Draws two-dimensional polylines (connected line and arc segments) with optional width and taper.
Preset Viewpoints	SETVPOINT	Displays the Preset Viewpoints dialog box so you can change the direction in which three-dimensional entities are viewed.
Print	PRINT	Displays the Print dialog box so you can print the current drawing.
Print Preview	PPREVIEW	Displays the Print dialog box so you can preview the current drawing before you print it.
Print Setup	PSETUP	Displays the Print Setup dialog box so you can set options for printing the current drawing.
Prompt History Window	PMTHIST	Displays the Prompt History window.
Properties	ENTPROP	Draws a three-dimensional pyramid.
Purge	PURGE	Clears the drawing file of unused drawing elements.
Pyramid	PYRAMID	Draws a three-dimensional pyramid.
Q

Quadrant Snap	QUADRANT	Toggles the Quadrant snap on or off.
Quick Print	QPRINT	Prints the contents of the active viewport.
Quick Save	QSAVE	Saves the current drawing.
Quick Snap	QUICK	Toggles the Quick snap on or off.
Quick Text	QTEXT	Turns Quick Text on or off; when on, text is displayed as placeholder boxes, rather than as characters or words.
R

Ray	RAY	Draws an infinite line in one direction from a specified starting point.
Reassociate Entity Data	REASSOCAPP	Associates programs with entity data.
Record Script	RECSCRIPT	Displays the Record Script dialog box so you can record a script file.
Rectangle	RECTANGLE	Draws a rectangle.
Redefine	REDEFINE	Restores a built-in command deleted by UNDEFINE.
Redo	REDO	Reverses an UNDO command. You must use the UNDO command before you can use the REDO command.
Redraw	REDRAW	Redraws the entire display, erasing any marker blips that were visible.
Redraw All	REDRAWALL	Redraws all viewports.
Regenerate	REGEN	Regenerates the current viewports.
Regenerate All	REGENALL	Regenerates all viewports.
Regenerate Automatically	REGENAUTO	Automatically regenerates a drawing.
Rename	RENAME	Changes the names associated with text styles, layers, linetypes, blocks, views, user coordinate systems, viewport configurations, and dimension styles.
Render	RENDER	Removes hidden lines, and then shades the surface as though it were illuminated from multiple light sources.
Render Settings	SETRENDER	Defines settings for rendering images, such as smoothing, base materials, and shadow resolution.
Restart Script	RSCRIPT	Restarts a command script from the beginning.
Resume	RESUME	Resumes an interrupted command script.
Revolved Surface	REVSURF	Creates a three-dimensional polygon mesh approximating a surface of revolution by rotating a curve around a selected axis.
Rotate	ROTATE	Rotates existing entities around a specified rotation point.
Rotate 3D	ROTATE3D	Rotates existing entities around a three-dimensional axis.
Ruled Surface	RULESURF	Creates a three-dimensional polygon mesh approximating a ruled surface between two curves.
S

Save	SAVE	Displays the Save Drawing File As dialog box so you can save the current drawing. You can also save the drawing using a different name.
Save All	SAVEALL	Saves all open drawings.
Save As	SAVEAS	Displays the Save Drawing File As dialog box so you can save the current drawing.
Save Block	WBLOCK	Displays the Save Block as Drawing/Block dialog box so you can save selected entities to a disk file.
Scale	SCALE	Changes the size of entities proportionally.
Script	SCRIPT	Displays the Run Script dialog box, allowing a script command to be carried out.
Select	SELECT	Groups entities into a selection set for use in subsequent commands.
Select All	SELGRIPS	Displays the grips of selected entities.
Select Color	SETCOLOR	Displays the Color dialog box so you can change the color in which subsequent entities are drawn.
Set Layer by Entity	SETLAYER	Sets a new layer as the current layer.
Set UCS	SETUCS	Displays the user coordinate systems dialog box so you can select the current UCS from the list of preset definitions.
Settings	SETTINGS	Displays the Drawing Settings dialog box so you can define various drawing settings.
Shade	SHADE	Shades models in the current viewport.
Snap	SNAP	Restricts cursor movement to specified increments.
Spelling	SPELL	Checks the spelling of text in the current drawing.
Sphere	SPHERE	Draws a three-dimensional spherical entity.
Spline	SPLINE	Draws a curved polyline.
Status	STATUS	Displays all dimensioning variables and their current values in the Prompt History window.
Status Bar	STATBAR	Turns the status at the bottom of the window on or off.
Stop Recording	STOPSCRIPT	Stops the recording of scripts.
Stretch	STRETCH	Moves a portion of a drawing while retaining connections to other parts of the drawing.
System Windows	SYSWINDOWS	Rearranges open drawing windows and icons.
T

Tangent Snap	TANGENT	Toggles the Tangent snap on or off.
Text (Paragraph)	DTEXT	Creates text entities.
Text (Single Line)	TEXT	Creates text in the drawing area.
Thickness	THICKNESS	Sets the thickness for all new entities.
Time Variables	TIME	Displays the drawing creation and update times; also permits control of an elapsed timer.
Tip of the Day	TIPOFDAY	Displays the Tip of the Day dialog box.
Tolerance	TOLERANCE	Displays the Geometric Tolerance dialog box so you can define the maximum allowable geometric variations in the current drawing.
Toolbar	TOOLBAR	Displays or hides toolbars.
Toolbar Configuration	TBCONFIG	Displays the Select Toolbars dialog box so you can select the toolbars you want displayed. You can also specify how tools are displayed in the toolbars.
Torus	TORUS	Draws a three-dimensional torus.
Trim	TRIM	Erases the portions of selected entities that cross a specified boundary.
U

UCS	UCS	Defines or modifies the current user coordinate system; see also EXPUCS.
UCS Icon	UCSICON	Turns the display of the UCS icon on or off.
Undefine	UNDEFINE	Allows a command defined by another program to override an IntelliCAD command.
Undelete	UNDELETE	Restores erased entities.
Undo	U	Reverses the effect of the previous command.
Undo Multiple	UNDO	Reverses the effect of the previous command; also reverses the effect of multiple commands and provides control of the UNDO command.
Units	UNITS	Selects coordinate and angle display formats and precision.
V

Variable Settings	SETVAR	Displays or changes system variables.
VBA Load Project	VBALOAD	Loads a Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) program.
VBA Run Macros	VBARUN	Displays the Macros dialog for you to define a Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) macro.
VBA Unload Project	VBAUNLOAD	Unloads the active Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) application.
View Control	VIEWCTL	Displays the View Control dialog box so you can dynamically control the viewports.
View Resolution	VIEWRES	Controls the precision and speed of drawing circles and arcs by specifying the number of sides in a circle.
View Save/Restore	VIEW	Saves the current graphics display and space as a named view, or restores a saved view and space to the display.
View Snapshot	VSNAPSHOT	Displays the View Snapshot dialog box so you can view a previously created slide file.
Viewpoint	VIEWPOINT	Selects the viewpoint for a three-dimensional visualization.
Viewports	VIEWPORTS	Divides the graphics display into multiple viewports, each of which can contain a different view of the current drawing.
Visible Intersection Snap	VISIBLE	Toggles the Visible Intersection snap on or off.
Visual Basic Editor	VBA	Starts the Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) program and displays the VBA window.
W

Wedge	WEDGE	Draws a three-dimensional wedge.
Window Arrange Icons	WIARRANGE	Arranges the minimized drawing windows so that all drawings are located at the bottom right corner of the program window.
Window Cascade	WCASCADE	Cascades the open drawing windows.
Window Close	WCLOSE	Closes the active drawing window.
Window Close All	WCLOSEALL	Closes all drawing windows.
Window New	WOPEN	Opens an additional window containing the current drawing.
Window Tile Horizontally	WHTILE	Horizontally tiles the open drawing windows.
Window Tile Vertically	WVTILE	Vertically tiles the open drawing windows.
WMF Out	WMFOUT	Exports a Windows metafile.
Workspaces	PMSPACE	Displays the Workspaces dialog box, from which you can create viewports and select the type of workspace in which you want to work.
Z

Zoom	ZOOM	Enlarges or reduces the display of the active drawing.


3D Entities

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities

Keyboard: 3D

Draws three-dimensional surface primitives: wedge, pyramid, box, cone, cylinder, sphere, dish, dome, torus, and mesh.

Wedge · Pyramid · Box · Cone · cyLinder · Sphere · DIsh · DOme · Torus · Mesh:

The 3D command combines the Wedge, Pyramid, Box, Cone, Cylinder, Sphere, Dish, Dome, Torus, and Mesh commands.

  Command List


3D Array

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > 3D Array ( [image])

Menu: Modify > 3D Array

Keyboard: 3DARRAY

Alias: 3A

Creates multiple copies of entities in three dimensions. Entities are arrayed in a three-dimensional rectangular (rows, columns, and levels) pattern or a two-dimensional polar (circular) pattern in three-dimensional space. The polar pattern is created by copying entities about a specified axis.

Select entities to array: Select the entities you want to array.

Type of array: Polar · <Rectangular>: To array entities using Rectangular, the default setting, press Enter. To array entities in a polar pattern, choose Polar or type P and press Enter.

To array entities in a rectangular pattern

When you array entities in a rectangular pattern, rows are defined along the x-axis, columns are defined along the y-axis, and levels are defined along the z-axis.

Entity before array.

A	Specify the number of rows in the rectangular array.

B	Specify the number of columns in the rectangular array.

C	Specify the number of levels in the rectangular array.

D	Original entity location in rectangular array.

Choose Rectangular.

Number of rows in the array <1>: To accept the default setting, press Enter. To create a different number of rows in the array, enter the number of rows you want. To array entities along the positive x-axis, enter a positive value. To array entities along the negative x-axis, enter a negative value. You must enter at least two rows to array entities in one column.

Number of columns <1>: To accept the default setting, press Enter. To create a different number of columns in the array, enter the number of columns you want. To array entities along the positive y-axis, enter a positive value. To array entities along the negative y-axis, enter a negative value. You must enter at least two columns to array entities in one row.

Number of levels <1>: To accept the default setting, press Enter. To create a different number of levels in the array, enter the number of levels you want. To array entities along the positive z-axis, enter a positive value. To array entities along the negative z-axis, enter a negative value. Creating an array with one level results in a two-dimensional array of entities.

Vertical distance between rows: Enter the distance in drawing units that you want between each row (x-coordinate) in the array.

Horizontal distance between columns: Enter the distance in drawing units that you want between each column (y-coordinate) in the array.

Depth between levels: Enter the distance in drawing units that you want between each level (z-coordinate) in the array.

To array entities in a polar pattern

Entity before array.

A	Specify the first point on the central axis of the polar array.

B	Specify a second point on the central axis of the polar array.

Choose Polar.

ENTER to specify angle between items · <Number of items to array>: Enter the number of copies of the entities you want arrayed. To specify the angle between entities, press Enter.

Angle to array (+ for ccw, - for cw) <360>: To array entities in a full circle (360°), the default setting, press Enter. To array entities in a counterclockwise direction, enter a positive value. To array entities in a clockwise direction, enter a negative value.

Rotate entities around the array? No · <Yes>: To accept the default selection, press Enter. To rotate entities as they are arrayed, choose Yes. To array entities without rotating them, choose No.

Center of 3d polar array: Specify the point around which you want the entities arrayed.

Specify second point along central axis of array: Specify a second point to define the axis around which the entities are rotated.

To specify the angle between entities

Press Enter.

Angle to array (+ for ccw, - for cw) <360>: To array entities in a full circle (360°), the default setting, press Enter. To array entities in a counterclockwise direction, enter a positive value. To array entities in a clockwise direction, enter a negative value.

Angle between items: Enter the angle between items.

Rotate entities around the array? No · <Yes>: To accept the default selection, press Enter. To rotate entities as they are arrayed, choose Yes. To array entities without rotating them, choose No.

Center of 3d polar array: Specify the point around which you want the entities arrayed.

Specify second point along central axis of array: Specify a second point to define the axis around which the entities are rotated.

  Command List


3D Polyline

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: 3DPOLY

Alias: 3P

Draws a three-dimensional polyline with straight segments. A three-dimensional polyline is not confined to a two-dimensional plane (as is a two-dimensional polyline); you can create polylines in three-dimensional space. Although the 3D Polyline command does not have as many options as the Polyline command, you can apply editing changes, such as splining, with the Edit Polyline command after the three-dimensional polyline is drawn.

An example of a three-dimensional polyline.

ENTER to use last point · Follow · <Start of polyline>: To start a polyline, specify a starting point. To use the last point drawn as the starting point for the polyline, press Enter. To continue the polyline in the direction in which you drew the last segment, choose Follow.

Next point: Specify the next point of the polyline.

Close · Undo · <Next point>: 	To continue adding another point to the polyline, specify the next point. To connect the end point of the last line segment to the start point of the first line segment, choose Close. To erase the last line segment you drew, choose Undo.

  Command List


About

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Help > About IntelliCAD

Keyboard: ABOUT

Displays the About IntelliCAD dialog box, which contains version and registration information, as well as copyright and trademark information. Click OK to exit the dialog box.

  Command List


Entity Snap Precision

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Entity Snap Precision ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap Precision

Keyboard: APERTURE

Alias: AP

Sets the selection area for snapping to entities.

Selection area for entity snap (1 - 50 pixels) <value>: Enter a value between 1 and 50 for the size of the aperture cursor. Choosing a larger value makes it easier to select an entity, but you may select more entities than you intend. Choosing a smaller value selects fewer entities, but you may find it difficult to select a single entity. Press Enter to accept the default value.

  Command List


Load Application

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Tools > Load LISP or SDS Application

Keyboard: APPLOAD

Displays the Load Application Files dialog box so you can load LISP and SDS programs that are not automatically loaded.

Dialog box control	Description

Applications Files:	Lists the names of LISP and SDS programs previously added to the list. This list does not mean that a program is already loaded; rather, it is provided as a convenience so that you do not need to search for programs you use only occasionally.

TIP To automatically load a program each time you open IntelliCAD, add the file name of the LISP program to the Icad.Lsp file and the file name of the SDS program to the Icad.Sds file.

Save Updates:

Add File:	Adds a file name to the list. Displays the Select LISP or SDS Files dialog box. Select the LSP or DLL file, and then click Open to add the file name to the list. .

Remove File:	Removes a file name from the list. Select the file name, and then click Remove File. The program does not warn you that the file will be removed from the list.

Load:	Loads the program into IntelliCAD memory. Select the file name, and then click Load. The program does not begin running automatically. Refer to the instructions that accompany the program.

Unload:	Unloads the program from IntelliCAD memory. Select the file name, and then click Unload.

OK:	Click OK to close the dialog box.

  Command List


Arc

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Arc

Menu: Insert > Arc

Keyboard: ARC

Alias: A

Draws an arc of any size.

TIP When you enter options while in the Arc command, use the uppercase letter of the option you want. If you enter the complete word for Center or End, the Snap To Center Point or Snap To End Point commands are initiated. You can also enter other ESNAP options while in the Arc command.

If you have not drawn an entity in this session, the following prompt is displayed in the command bar:

Center · <Start of arc>: To draw an arc using the default method, select a start point. To specify the center point of the arc, choose Center.

If you have drawn an entity in this session, the following prompt is displayed in the command bar:

ENTER to use last point · Center · Follow · <Start of arc>: To start an arc, specify a point as its starting point, the default. To use the last point drawn as the start point for the arc, press Enter. To specify the center point of the arc, choose Center. To continue the arc in the direction in which you drew the last entity, choose Follow.

  Command List


To draw an arc by specifying three points

A	Specify the start point of the arc.

B	Specify the second point through which the circumference of the arc passes.

C	Specify the end point of the arc.

Angle · Center · Direction · End · Radius · <Second point>: To continue drawing an arc, specify a second point for it. This second point lies anywhere along the arc. To specify the angle of the arc, choose Angle. To specify the center point of the arc, choose Center. To specify the direction of the arc, choose Direction. To specify the end point of the arc, choose End. To specify the radius of the arc, choose Radius.

End point: Specify the end point of the arc.

  Command List


To draw an arc by specifying its angle

A	Specify the start point of the arc.

B	Specify the start of the included angle of the arc.

C	Specify the end of the included angle.

D	Specify the end point of the arc.

Choose Angle.

Included angle for arc: Enter the degree of the rotation. To draw the arc in a counterclockwise direction, enter a positive value. To draw the arc in a clockwise direction, enter a negative value. Or, you can specify two points on the screen to indicate the angle.

Center · <Endpoint of arc>: Specify the end point of the arc. To specify the center point of the arc, choose Center.

  Command List


To draw an arc by specifying its center point

A	Specify the start point of the arc.

B	Specify the center point of the arc.

C	Specify the end point of the arc.

Choose Center.

Center of arc: Specify the center point of the arc.

Angle · Length of chord · <End point>: To end an arc, specify its end point. To specify its angle, choose Angle. To specify the chord of the angle, choose Length of chord.

NOTE The chord of an arc is the straight-line distance between its two endpoints.

To specify the length of the chord

Choose Length of chord.

Length of chord: Enter the length of the chord, or specify two points. To draw a minor arc in a counterclockwise direction from the start point, enter a positive value. To draw a major arc in a counterclockwise direction from the start point, enter a negative value. Or, you can specify two points on the screen to indicate the length of the chord.

  Command List


To draw an arc by specifying its direction

A	Specify the start point of the arc.

B	Specify the direction of the arc.

C	Specify the end point of the arc.

Choose Direction.

Follow · <Initial direction for arc>: To specify the direction, move the cursor and click the mouse. To continue drawing an arc in the direction of the entity you previously drew, choose Follow.

End point: To end the arc, specify its end point.

  Command List


To draw an arc by specifying its start and end points

A	Specify the start point of the arc.

B	Specify the end point of the arc.

C	Specify the center point of the arc.

Choose End.

End of arc: To define the end of an arc, specify a point.

Angle · Direction · Radius · <Center point>: To draw an arc using the Start-End-Center method, which is the default, press Enter. To draw an arc using the Start-End-Angle method, choose Angle. To draw an arc using the Start-End-Direction method, choose Direction. To draw an arc using the Start-End-Radius method, choose Radius.

To draw an arc by specifying its radius

Choose Radius.

Radius of arc: Enter the radius of the arc or specify two points..

  Command List


Area

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Inquiry > Area ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Inquiry > Area

Keyboard: AREA

Alias: AA

Calculates the area of entities or defined areas.

Entity · Add · Subtract · <First point>: To calculate the area by placing points, specify an initial point. To find the area of a single entity, choose Entity. To find the area of one or more entities, choose Add. To subtract the area of multiple entities, choose Subtract.

To calculate the area by specifying points

A	Specify the first point of the area to be calculated.

B	Specify the second point.

C	Specify the third point.

Specify the start point of the area you want to calculate.

<Next point>: Specify the second point of the area you want to calculate. Continue to specify points. All points must be in the x,y plane. If you do not close the area you want to calculate, the program calculates the area as if the last point you specify were connected to the first point; however, the length is not added to the calculation for the length. After you specify all the points you want included in the area calculation, right-click the mouse or press Enter. The area and perimeter are displayed in the command bar. If you do not have the command bar visible, the Prompt History window opens, and the area and perimeter are displayed there.

The area and perimeter displayed in the command bar.

To select the entity

Entities that you can select to calculate an area are circles, polylines, polygons, traces, and planes. When you select a line or an arc, only the length is calculated.

A	Select the entity for the area you want to calculate.

Choose Entity.

Select entity for area calculation: The area is displayed in the command bar. For a plane, polygon, or polyline, the result is similar to:

Area = 6.1296 sq. units, Perimeter = 10.6762

For a circle, the result is similar to:

Area = 6.4033 sq. units, Circumference = 8.9703

For an arc or line, the result is similar to:

Length = 10.8278

After you select an open polyline, the area is calculated as if the end point of the last segment drawn is connected to the start point of the first segment; however, the length to close the polyline is not added to the calculation for the length.

TIP For a trace, the Area command calculates the area and length of a single trace segment. For polylines with width, the Area command calculates the area and length based on the centerline of the wide polyline segments.

To add and subtract entities

You can add and subtract entities to keep a running total of the area and perimeter calculations.

A	Select the first area to be calculated.

B	Select an entity to add or subtract from the total area.

C	Select another entity to add or subtract from the total area.

Choose Add or Subtract.

If you choose Add, the following prompt is displayed in the command bar:

Adding: Entity · Subtract · <First point>: To select an area to add, specify the first point. To select an entity to add, choose Entity. Continue to specify points or select entities to calculate the area of your selections. To subtract an area while adding an area, right-click the mouse, choose Subtract, and then specify the first point or entity of the area you want to subtract.

If you choose Subtract, the following prompt is displayed in the command bar:

Subtracting: Entity · Add · <First point>: To select an area to subtract, specify the first point from which you want to subtract the area. To select an entity to subtract, choose Entity. Continue to specify points or select entities to subtract the area of your selections. To add an area while subtracting, right-click the mouse, choose Add, and then specify the first point or entity of the area you want to add.

  Command List


Array

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Array ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Array

Keyboard: ARRAY

Alias: AR

Creates multiple copies of entities in one of two symmetrical patterns: rectangular (rows and columns) or polar (circular). Similar to 3DARRAY, except that entities are arrayed in two-dimensional space. A polar array copies entities in a circumference around a center point that you specify; the entities can be rotated (all facing the center point) or not.

Select entities to array: Select the entities you want to array, and then right-click the mouse or press Enter.

Type of array: Polar · <Rectangular>: To create a rectangular array, press Enter. To create a polar array, choose Polar.

TIP To create a linear array along a path, use the Divide or Measure commands, with the Block option. To make an irregular array, use the Copy command with the Multiple option.

To array entities in a rectangular pattern

Entities are arrayed in a rectangular pattern in the positive direction of the x- and y-axes. To array entities in the negative direction, enter a negative value for the number of rows and columns. A rectangular array must have at least two rows or two columns.

A	Select the entity you want to array.

B	Specify the number of rows in the rectangular array.

C	Specify the number of columns in the rectangular array.

Choose Rectangular.

Number of rows in the array <1>: Enter the number of rows you want in the array.

Number of columns <1>: Enter the number of columns you want in the array.

NOTE You must have at least two rows or at least two columns. If you specify 1 as the number for both rows and columns, the program exits the Array command.

Vertical distance between rows, or spacing rectangle: Enter the amount of space you want between each row in the array. Or, pick two points on the screen that represents the vertical and horizontal distance between rows and columns.

Horizontal distance between columns: Enter the amount of space you want between each column in the array.

NOTE If either the vertical or horizontal distance is zero, the program does not draw entities in that direction, even if you specify the number of entities to draw. If the vertical and horizontal distances are both zero, the program does not draw an array at all.

To array entities in a polar pattern

A	Select the entity you want to array.

B	Specify the center point of the array. The graphic on the left shows entities rotated around the array.

Choose Polar.

Base · Center of polar array: Specify the point around which you want the entities arrayed.

ENTER to specify angle between items · <Number of items to array>: To specify the number of items you want to array, enter a number. To specify the angle, press Enter.

Angle to array (+ for ccw, - for cw) <360>: To array entities in a full circle (360°), the default setting, press Enter. To array entities in a counterclockwise direction, enter a positive value. To array entities in a clockwise direction, enter a negative value. The polar array begins at 0 degrees (default = east). Angle between items: Enter the degree of the angle between the items arrayed.

Rotate entities around the array? No · <Yes>: To accept Yes, the default selection, press Enter. To array entities without rotating them, choose No.

  Command List


Attribute Definition

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: ATTDEF

Alias: -AT

Creates an Attribute Definition entity for text that you want associated with a block definition.

Toggle attribute modes: Fixed: N · Hidden: N · Defined: N · Validate: N · <PROceed>: To create an Attribute Definition, press Enter. To switch the attribute modes, choose Fixed, Hidden, Defined, or Validate. When you choose a mode, the setting switches between Y(es) and N(o).

To specify an attribute mode

To specify a fixed value when you insert a block, choose Y for Fixed.

To specify that the attribute values are not displayed when you insert the block, choose Y for Hidden. (You can display Hidden attributes later using a different command.)

To specify that you want the attribute set to its default value when you insert a block containing a preset attribute, choose Y for Defined.

To specify that you want to be prompted for verification that the attribute value is correct when you insert a block, choose Y for Validate.

To define an attribute

Choose PROceed.

Name of attribute: Enter a name for the attribute. You can enter alphabetic and numeric characters, but do not enter spaces.

Prompt: Enter a prompt, using text and spaces. This prompt appears when you insert the attribute into the drawing, allowing you to enter text in the drawing. This prompt option does not appear when you choose Y for Fixed.

Default Text: Enter the text that you want associated with the attribute. This text appears when you insert a block containing this attribute.

Text: Style · Align · Fit · Center · Middle · Right · Justify · <Start point>: To start typing text, specify the start point for the text. To specify the text style or alignment, choose Style, Align, Fit, Center, Middle, Right, or Justify.

Height of text <value>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the text height, enter a new value or specify a point.

Rotation angle of text <0º>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the angle, enter the rotation angle of the text, or specify a point.

NOTE When you have finished defining an attribute, you see its name on the screen. To attach the attribute to a block, use the Block command. Then insert the block and the attribute, using the Insert command, at which point the program prompts you to enter text for the attribute.

   Command List


Attribute Display

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: ATTDISP

Alias: AD

Shows all attributes, no attributes, or those normally visible.

Attribute display mode: ON · OFF · Normal <Normal>: To accept the default value, Normal, press Enter. To display all attributes, choose ON. To turn off the display of all attributes, choose OFF.

  Command List


Edit Attribute

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Tools > Edit Attributes ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Edit Attributes

Keyboard: ATTEDIT

Alias: -ATE

Edits the attribute text associated with blocks. You can edit attributes individually or globally. When you edit attributes individually, you can edit all attributes. When you globally edit attributes, you can replace a single text string with another.

Edit attributes one at a time? <Y> To edit the text of attributes individually, press Enter. To edit the text of multiple attributes, choose No.

NOTE To edit hidden attributes, choose Yes at this prompt. Fixed attributes cannot be edited.

Edit attributes of which blocks? <*>: To edit all blocks with attributes, the default, press Enter. Or enter the name of the block containing the attributes you want to edit.

Edit attributes with these names <*>: To edit all attributes, press Enter. Or enter the name of the attribute you want to edit.

Edit attributes with this text <*>: To edit all attribute text, press Enter. Or enter the text associated with the attribute you want to edit.

Select Attributes: Select the attributes you want to edit.

Position · Angle · Text · Style · Color · Height · Layer · Next · pRev · Quit · <Next>: To edit the text of the next attribute, the default, press Enter. To change the insertion point of the attribute text, choose Position. To change the angle of the attribute text, choose Angle. To change the text of the attribute, choose Text. To change the style of the attribute text, choose Style. To change the color of the attribute text, choose Color. To change the height of the attribute text, choose Height. To change the layer with which the attribute text is associated, choose Layer. To edit the next attribute, choose Next. To edit the previous attribute, choose pRev. To quit editing attributes, choose Quit.

TIP To see the changed attributes displayed before you exit the command, turn REGENAUTO on.

To change the insertion point of the attribute text

Current insertion point of the attribute text.

Choose Position.

Enter text insertion point: Specify a new insertion point. You can also enter the x,y-coordinates for the insertion point.

To change the angle of the attribute text

Changing the angle of the attribute text.

Choose Angle.

New rotation angle <0°>: To accept the default setting, press Enter. To change the angle of the selected attribute text, enter the angle of rotation.

To change the text of the attribute

Changing the existing text of attribute text.

Choose Text.

Change · <Replace>: To replace the existing text for the whole attribute, press Enter. To change part of the attribute, choose Change.

To replace the text

Choose Replace.

New attribute text <value>: To accept the default text, press Enter. To change the text, enter new attribute text.

To change the text

Choose Change.

Text to change: Enter the character(s) you want to change.

New text: Enter the new characters.

To change the text style of the attribute

Changing the text style of the attribute text.

Choose Style.

New text style or ENTER for no change <STANDARD>: To accept the default setting, press Enter. To change the style, enter the name of the text style you want.

To change the color of the attribute text

Choose Color.

New color <BYLAYER>: To accept the default setting, press Enter. To change the color of the selected attribute text, enter the color you want, either by number or by name.

To enter a color number

Enter a color number from the color palette (1 through 255). Enter 0 for BYLAYER, or enter 256 for BYBLOCK.

To enter a color name

Select the name of the standard color. The seven standard color names are red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta, and white.

To change the height of the attribute text

Changing the height of the attribute text.

Choose Height.

New height <value>: To accept the default setting, press Enter. To change the height of the selected attribute text, enter a new value or specify two points.

To change the layer with which the attribute text is associated

Choose Layer.

New layer or ENTER for no change <0>: To accept the default setting, press Enter. To change the layer, enter the name of the layer.

To edit another attribute

Selecting the next or previous attribute to be edited.

Choose Next or pRev until the attribute you want to edit is marked with an x. Continue to choose Next or pRev until the attribute is marked.

  Command List


Attribute Extract

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Tools > Extract Attributes

Keyboard: ATTEXT

Alias: AX

Extracts attribute data from a drawing.

Select Entities (E), or extract attributes as: DXF · SDF · <CDF>?: To select the entities from which you want to extract attribute data, choose Select Entities. To extract all attribute data in a comma-delimited text format (.out), the default, choose CDF or press Enter. To extract all attribute data in Drawing Interchange Format (.dxx), choose DXF. To extract all attribute data in a space-delimited text format (.out), choose SDF.

To extract attributes in Drawing Interchange Format (DXF)

Choose DXF. The Select Output File dialog box appears.

The attributes are extracted into a modified drawing exchange format that contains only the block reference, attribute, and end of sequence information. The file name is saved with the .dxx file extension.

To extract attributes in space-delimited format (SDF)

The space-delimited format creates one record for each block in the drawing.

Choose SDF. The Select Template File dialog box appears. Select the template file, and then click Save. The program displays the Select Output File dialog box. Type a name, and then click Save.

To extract attributes in comma-delimited format (CDF)

The comma-delimited format creates one record for each block in the drawing.

Choose CDF. The Select Template File dialog box appears. Select the template file, and then click Save. The program displays the Select Output File dialog box. Type a name, and then click Save. See following Note.

NOTE Before you can use this command with the SDF or CDF options, you must first create a template file. (The DXF option does not use a template file.) The template file specifies which attribute data to extract and the format in which to store the data. A template file is a simple ASCII text file that contains the following format codes:

C	Character (A - Z)

D	Digit (0 - 9)

F	Width of field (000 - 999)

P	Decimal places (.0 - .999)

Each line in the template file is a "record," which extracts one particular attribute from the drawing.

  Command List


Backgrounds

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Rendering > Backgrounds ( [image])

Menu: View > Rendering > Backgrounds

Keyboard: BACKGROUNDS

Creates a backdrop for your model when it is rendered using the Full Render command. A background is an image that surrounds those parts of your model not covered by the base or the model itself. Think of it as a curtain behind your model. By default, the background is a blue gradient, but you can choose from several built-in background images or load your own.

Background settings are saved in the drawing file.

To add a background to your rendered model

Select a background pattern from the ones displayed in the dialog box. Double-click the background in the dialog box or choose Details to customize a background.

Background	Description

None	No image, only a black background.

Constant	A single color. Double-click Constant or choose Details to pick another color.

Graduated	Blends two colors; one from the top and one from the bottom of the background (also known as a gradient). Double-click Graduated or choose Details to pick the top and bottom colors.

Clouds	Simulates a cloudy sky in the background. Double-click Clouds or choose Details to change the size or color of the clouds and sky.

Image	Loads an existing .bmp or .tif image to use as a background. Double-click Image or choose Details to find and load the image.

To customize a graduated background

Double-click Graduated or select Graduated and choose Details, then select colors for the top and bottom of the background.

Dialog box control	Description

Top Color	Specifies the color to graduate from the top of the background. Click the color box to display a palette of colors to select.

Bottom Color	Specifies the color to graduate from the bottom of the background. Click the color box to display a palette of colors to select.

To customize a clouds background

Double-click Clouds or select Clouds and choose Details, then define settings for the clouds and sky.

Dialog box control	Description

Clouds Color	Specifies the color to use for the clouds in the background. Click the color box to display a palette of colors to select.

Sky Color	Specifies the color to use for the sky in the background. Click the color box to display a palette of colors to select.

Detail	Adjusts the relative density of the clouds in the background. Coarser clouds are more dense and solid-looking. Finer clouds are more opaque and wispy.

Size	Adjusts the relative size of the clouds in the background.

TIP Your model will render faster if you use a constant color background or do not use a background at all (None). Keep in mind, however, that backgrounds do not take long to compute when compared to other rendering effects.

  Command List


Base Point

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Base Point ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Base Point

Keyboard: BASE

Alias: BA

Sets the base point for inserting this drawing into another drawing.

Base point for inserting this drawing <0.0000, 0.0000, 0.0000>: To accept the current base point, the default, press Enter, or enter the x,y,z-coordinates for the new base point.

NOTE Using the Base command is similar to specifying the insertion point when you create a block. When you insert a drawing into another drawing, the program assumes the insertion point (base) of 0,0,0. With the Base command, you can change the insertion point to another value.

  Command List


Marker Blips

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Settings > Drawing Settings > Display tab > Show Marker Blips check box

Keyboard: BLIPMODE

Alias: BM

Turns selection markers, called blips, on and off . A blip is the plus sign (+) that appears temporarily when you specify a point on the screen.

With marker blips on.	With marker blips off.
Blipmode is currently off: ON · Toggle · <Off>: To keep Blipmode turned off, the default, press Enter. To turn Blipmode on, choose ON. To switch Blipmode to its opposite setting, choose Toggle.

  Command List


Block

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Tools > Create Block ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Create Block

Keyboard: BLOCK

Alias: -B

Forms a single compound entity from a group of entities.

A	Specify the insertion point for the block.

B	Select the first entity you want included in the block.

C	Select the second entity you want included in the block.

D	The block, when inserted into your drawing.

Name for new block, or ? to list existing blocks: Enter the name of the block that you are creating. You can name the new block using any alphanumeric characters, including a dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_), up to a maximum of 31 characters. To view a list of blocks in the drawing, choose ?.

If you enter the name of an existing block, the following message prompts whether you want to redefine the block: "The block already exists. Do you want to redefine it?" If you choose N, the Block command ends. If you choose Y, the Block command continues with the following prompts.

Insertion point for new block: Specify an insertion point, which is the base point for the block when it is inserted.

Select entities for block: Select the entities that you want included in the block. The entities you select disappear from the drawing.

To or retrieve the deleted entities, type UNDELETE. The entities are replaced in the drawing.

With blocks, you can combine numerous entities into a single entity and then reuse it, inserting multiple copies. When you select entities for a block, they are removed from the drawing and become part of the block you create. You can insert the block into other drawings with the INSERT command.

The block you create using the Block command exists only in the drawing in which you created it. You can use the Drawing Explorer to copy the block to other open drawings or to save the block to a disk.

To list existing blocks

Choose ?.

Block(s) to list <* for all>: Enter *. A list of the blocks defined in your drawing is displayed in the Prompt History window in four categories:

User Blocks: Blocks that you created.

External References: Externally referenced drawings placed by the External Reference command.

Dependent Blocks: Blocks found in the externally referenced drawings.

Unnamed Blocks: Blocks created by the program, such as hatch patterns.

To redefine a block

When you are prompted for the name of the block, enter the name of the block you want to redefine. At the prompt, choose Yes to redefine the block. Continue as if you are defining a new block. The new block replaces the block of the same name.

  Command List


Box

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Box ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Box

Keyboard: BOX

Alias: AI_BOX

Draws a three-dimensional box using surfaces. If you enter a positive value for the length, width, or height, the box is drawn in the positive direction along the x,y,z axes. If you enter a negative value for the length, width, or height, the box is drawn t in the negative direction along the x,y,z axes.

Center · <Corner of box> <0.0000,0.0000,0.0000>: To draw a box using the Corner method, the default, specify a point for the first corner. To specify an exact location for the corner of the box, enter the x,y,z-coordinates. To draw a box symmetrically around a center point, choose Center.

To draw a box using the Corner method

A	Specify the first point.

B	Specify a point for the opposite corner.

C	Specify the height.

Specify a point for the first corner of the box.

Cube · Length · <Opposite corner>: Specify a point for the opposite corner for the base of the box. To draw a box with three equal sides, choose Cube. To draw a box with different length, width, and height measurements, choose Length.

To define the box by selecting the opposite corner

Specify the opposite corner of the box. Doing this defines the first plane of the box.

Height of box: Enter the height of the box or specify two points.

To define the box by specifying the sides of a cube

Choose Cube. A cube is a box for which the length, width, and height are the same dimensions.

Length of sides of cube: Enter the length for the sides of the cube, or specify two points.

To define the box with different length, width, and height measurements

A	Specify the length of the box.

B	Specify the width of the box.

C	Specify the height of the box.

Choose Length.

Length of side of box: Enter the length of the box or specify two points.

Width of box: Enter the width of the box or specify two points.

Height of box: Enter the height of the box or specify two points.

To draw a box using the Center method

Choose Center.

Center <0.0000,0.0000,0.0000>: Specify the center point of the box by entering the x,y,z-coordinates or by selecting a point.

Cube · Length · <Opposite corner>: Specify a point for the corner of the box. To draw a box with three equal sides, choose Cube. To draw a box with different length, width, and height measurements, choose Length.

To define the box by selecting the opposite corner

Specify the corner of the box opposite the corner you first selected. Doing this defines the first plane of the box.

Height of box: Enter the height of the box or specify two points.

To define the box by entering the cube dimensions

Choose Cube. A cube is a box in which the length, width, and height are the same dimensions.

Length of sides of cube: Enter the length of the sides or specify two points.

To define the box different length, width, and height measurements

Choose Length.

Length of side of box: Enter the length of the box or specify two points.

Width of box: Enter the width of the box or specify two points.

Height of box: Enter the height of the box or specify two points.

  Command List


Break

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Break ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Break

Keyboard: BREAK

Alias: BR

Splits an entity into two entities. You can split, or remove the ends from, lines, arcs, circles, polylines, infinite lines, rays, ellipses, and donuts.

A Selects the entity and it’s first break point on the entity. B Specify the second break point on the entity.	Replace
Select entity to break: Select the entity you want to break.

If you specify a point, the following prompt appears in the command bar:

First break point · <Second break point>: Specify the second break point, the default setting (the program assumes that the first point you specified is the first break point that you want). To specify the first break point, choose First break point, or type F and press Enter.

If you select the entity by drawing a crossing window, the following prompt appears in the command bar:

A Select the entity to break. B Specify the first break point on the entity. C Specify the second break point on the entity.	Replace
First break point: Specify the first point at which you want to break the entity.

Second break point: Specify the second break point. To convert a circle to an arc, remove a piece of the circle by selecting the second break point counterclockwise from the first break point you selected.

TIP To break an entity into two separate entities, specify the same point for both the first and second break points. You can also enter the at sign (@) in the command bar when you are prompted to specify the second point.

  Command List


Calculator

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: CALCULATOR

Alias: CAL

Displays the standard Windows Calculator. For information about using the Calculator, refer to the Calculator Help topics.

To change the Calculator to scientific mode, choose View > Scientific.

To paste the result of a calculation into the program, select the result, and then press Ctrl+C in the calculator and Ctrl+V in the program.

  Command List


Center Snap

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Snap > Set Center Snap ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap > Center Snap

Keyboard: CENTER

Alias: CEN

Toggles the Center entity snap mode on or off. When set to ON, you can snap a new entity that you are drawing to the center point of another entity. You can snap to the center point of arcs, circles, ellipses, and elliptical arcs.

You can use the Center command as a one-time (temporary) snap while you are using another command. You can use the CEN alias within another command, but you must use the full keyboard entry CENTER at the prompt.

A	When snapping to the center point of an entity, position the pointer over the entity. The new entity snaps to the center point of the entity you select.

NOTE The Center command is intended for use in macros. For this reason, it has no prompts and it does not indicate whether you are turning it on or off. To check the status of entity snaps, display the Entity Snaps toolbar. The entity snaps that are on appear recessed on the toolbar. During a drawing or editing command, the cursor changes to display the entity snap currently in effect.

  Command List


Chamfer

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Chamfer ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Chamfer

Keyboard: CHAMFER

Alias: CHA

Creates a chamfer, or a beveled edge, at the intersection of two lines, rays, or infinite lines. If both entities are on the same layer, the chamfer is drawn on that layer. If the entities you want to chamfer are on two different layers, the chamfer is drawn on the current layer. If the entities you want to chamfer do not intersect, they are trimmed or extended until they can be chamfered. You can also create a chamfer between all segments of a polyline.

Chamfer: Settings · Polyline · <Select first entity>: Select the first entity that you want to chamfer. To change the chamfer settings, choose Settings. To chamfer a polyline, choose Polyline.

To select two separate entities to chamfer

A	Select the first entity that you want to chamfer.

B	Select the second entity.

C	To change the first distance applied, choose Chamfer Settings > Drawing Settings dialog box > Entity Modification tab > and change the First Distance value.

D	To change the second distance applied, use the same process and change the Second Distance value.

Select the first entity.

Select second entity: Select the second entity.

To chamfer a polyline

Polyline to chamfer.	Polyline with chamfer.
To chamfer polyline segments, the segments must be connected. All segments of the polyline are chamfered. If the polyline segments you want to chamfer are separated by a line or arc segment, that segment is removed and a chamfer line is inserted.

Choose Polyline.

Select 2D polyline to chamfer: Select the polyline to chamfer. All intersecting edges of the polyline are chamfered.

To change the chamfer settings

Choose Settings.

The Drawing Settings dialog box appears with the Entity Modification tab selected and the current settings for Chamfer/Fillet displayed.

Make the changes you want, and then click OK to exit the dialog box and return to your drawing. To continue to chamfer other entities, select an entity or choose Polyline.

  Command List


Change

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Change ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Change

Keyboard: CHANGE

Alias: -CH

Changes the location, size, color, elevation, layer, linetype, linetype scale, and thickness of selected entities. When you select a line, you can also change the location of the end points of the line. When you select a circle, you can also change the diameter of the circle. When you select a text entity, you can also change the insertion point, style, height, rotation angle, and the text of the entity. This command is especially useful for text entities.

TIP For best results, we recommend that you change one entity at a time.

Select entities to change: Select the entity that you want to change.

Entities · Properties · <Change point>: Specify the change point, the default. To change the angle and location of ray and infinite line entities, choose Entities. To change the properties of the entities, choose Properties.

To change a ray or infinite line entity

Choose Entities.

Point change for Rays and Inflines: Angle · Point · <None>: To keep the ray or infinite line, the default, press Enter. To change the angle, choose Angle. To change the point through which the ray or infinite line passes, choose Point. The changes take effect after the next prompt.

Change: Entities · Properties · <Change point>: Click to change the angle or pass-through point of the ray or infinite line.

To change the end point of a line

A Specify a new end point for the line.	Result.
Specify a new end point for the line. If you are drawing orthographically (ORTHOGONAL is set to on), the new end point you specify is drawn parallel to the x- or y-axis.

NOTE You cannot use the Change command to change the end point of a polyline. Instead, use the Edit Polyline command.

To change the radius of a circle or an arc

A Specify the radius..	Result.
Specify a new radius for the circle or arc.

To change a text entity

New point for text, or ENTER to change: Specify a new location for the beginning of the text block. As you move the input device, the new location is displayed. Or to leave the insertion point unchanged, press Enter.

New style <default>: To keep the same text style, press Enter or right-click the mouse. Or enter the name of a different text style.

New height <value>: To keep the current text height, press Enter. Or enter a new height for the text.

New rotation angle <0>: To keep the current angle, press Enter. Or enter a new rotation angle of the text.

New text <This is sample text>: To keep the current text, press Enter. Or enter new text.

To change the properties of the entities

Choose Properties.

Property to change: Color · Elevation · LAyer · LType · ltScale · Thickness: To change the color of the entities, choose Color. To change the elevation of the entities, choose Elevation. To change the layer in which the entity resides, choose LAyer. To change the linetype of the entities, choose LType. To change the linetype scale of the entities, choose ltScale. To change the thickness of the entities, choose Thickness.

If you select more than one entity to change, and those entities have different properties (for example, different layer properties), the current value for the property you choose to change becomes "varies." When you change the properties for multiple entities, all entities in the selection set are changed.

To change the color

Choose Color.

New color <BYLAYER>: Enter a new color. You can enter a color value from the standard Windows color palette (1-255), 0 for BYLAYER, 256 for BYBLOCK, or you can enter the name of one of the seven standard colors (red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta, and white), or choose BYLAYER or BYBLOCK.

To change the elevation

Changing the elevation of a two-dimensional entity changes its position on the z-axis. To change the elevation of a two-dimensional entity, all points on the entity must have the same elevation.

Choose Elevation.

New elevation <0.0000>: Enter a new elevation for the entities.

To change the layer

Choose LAyer.

New layer <0>: Enter the name of the layer with which you want the entities associated.

To change the linetype

Choose LType.

New linetype <CONTINUOUS>: Enter the name of a new linetype.

NOTE If the program does not have the linetype you select, it attempts to load the linetype from icad.lin. If the program cannot locate the linetype in this file, use the LINETYPE command to add the linetype file.

To change the linetype scale

Choose ltScale.

New linetype scale <1.0000>: To accept 1.0000, the default, press Enter. Or enter a new linetype scale.

To change the thickness

Changing the thickness of a two-dimensional entity changes the entity's z-direction thickness. You cannot change the thickness of a three-dimensional polyline, dimension entity, or floating viewport entity.

Choose Thickness.

New thickness <0.0000>: Enter a new thickness.

  Command List


Change Properties

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Properties ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Properties

Keyboard: CHPROP

Changes the properties of entities you select.

Property to change: Color · Elevation · LAyer · LType · ltScale · Thickness: To change an entity’s color, choose Color. To change an entity’s elevation, choose Elevation. To change the layer in which an entity resides, choose LAyer. To change an entity’s linetype, choose LType. To change an entity’s linetype scale, choose ltScale. To change an entity’s thickness, choose Thickness.

To change the color

Choose Color.

New color <BYLAYER>: Enter a new color. You can enter a color value from the standard Windows palette (1-255), 0 for BYLAYER, 256 for BYBLOCK, or you can enter the name of one of the seven standard colors (red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta, and white), or choose BYLAYER or BYBLOCK.

To change the elevation

Changing the elevation of two-dimensional entity changes its position on the z-axis. To change the elevation of a two-dimensional entity, all points on the entity must have the same elevation.

Choose Elevation.

New elevation <0.0000>: To accept the current elevation, press Enter. Or enter a new value.

To change the layer

Choose LAyer.

New layer <0>: Enter the name of the layer with which you want the entities associated.

To change the linetype

Choose LType.

New linetype <CONTINUOUS>: Enter the name of a new linetype.

If the linetype you enter is not already loaded, the program tries to load the linetype from icad.lin. If the program cannot locate the linetype in this file, use the LINETYPE command to load the linetype file.

To change the linetype scale

Choose ltScale.

New linetype scale <1.0000>: To accept 1.0000, the default, press Enter, or enter a new linetype scale.

To change the thickness

Changing the thickness of a two-dimensional entity changes the entity's z-direction thickness. You cannot change the thickness of a three-dimensional polyline, dimension entity, or floating viewport entity.

Choose Thickness.

New thickness <0.0000>: Enter a new thickness.

  Command List


Circle

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Circle

Menu: Insert > Circle

Alias: C

Draws a circle of any size. The default method of drawing a circle is by center point and radius, but there are other methods you can use.

2Point · 3Point · RadTanTan · Arc · Multiple · <Center of circle>: To draw a circle by specifying the center point and radius or diameter, specify the center point of the circle. To draw a circle using the two-point method, choose 2Point. To draw a circle using the three-point method, choose 3Point. To draw a circle by specifying the radius and two tangents, choose RadTanTan. To convert an arc to a circle, choose Arc. To draw multiple circles, choose Multiple and then select the type of circle you want to draw.

  Command List


To draw a circle by specifying the center point and radius

A	Specify the center point of the circle.

B	Specify a second point indicating the radius of the circle (another point through which the circumference of the circle passes).

Specify the center point of the circle.

Diameter · <Radius>: To draw a circle based on the radius, enter the radius or specify a point. To draw a circle based on the diameter, choose Diameter and enter the diameter or specify a point.

  Command List


To draw a circle by specifying the center point and diameter

A	Specify the center point of the circle.

B	Specify a second point indicating the diameter of the circle.

Specify the center point of the circle.

Diameter · <Radius>: To draw a circle based on the radius, enter the radius or specify a point. To draw a circle based on the diameter, choose Diameter and enter the diameter or specify a point.

  Command List


To draw a circle by specifying two points on the diameter

A	Specify the first point on the diameter of the circle.

B	Specify a second point on the diameter of the circle.

Choose 2Point.

First point on diameter: Specify the first point on the diameter of the circle.

Second point on diameter: Specify the second point on the diameter of the circle.

  Command List


To draw a circle by specifying three points on the circumference

A	Specify the first point on the circumference of the circle.

B	Specify a second point on the circumference of the circle.

C	Specify a third point on the circumference of the circle.

Choose 3Point.

First point on circle: Specify the first point on the circumference of the circle.

Second point: Specify the second point on the circumference of the circle.

Third point: Specify the third point on the circumference of the circle.

  Command List


To draw a circle by specifying the radius and two tangent points

A	Specify two points indicating the radius of the circle.

B	Select the first entity that you want the circle to touch.

C	Select the second entity that you want the circle to touch.

Choose RadTanTan.

Radius of circle <value>: Enter the radius or specify a point. (If you specify a point for the radius, you are prompted to specify a second point.)

Select first tangent point: Select the first entity that you want the circle to touch.

Select second tangent point: Select the second entity that you want the circle to touch.

 If a circle cannot be drawn with the radius and tangent points you selected, a message is displayed in the command bar stating that no circle is possible. If two different circles are possible (based on the specifications you selected), a circle is drawn using the tangent points closest to points where you selected the entities.

  Command List


To convert an arc to a circle

A	Select the arc you want to convert to a circle.

Choose Arc.

Select arc to convert to circle: Select the arc that you want to convert to a circle.

  Command List


To draw multiple circles

Choose Multiple.

2Point · 3Point · RadTanTan · Arc · <Center of circle>: To draw a circle by specifying the center point and radius or diameter, specify the center point of the circle. To draw a circle using the two-point method, choose 2Point. To draw a circle using the three-point method, choose 3Point. To draw a circle by specifying the radius and two tangents, choose RadTanTan. To convert an arc to a circle, choose Arc.

After you draw the first circle, you continue placing circles with the same dimensions by moving the cursor to another location and clicking the mouse.

  Command List


Close Drawing

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: File > Close

Keyboard: CLOSE

Shortcut: Ctrl+F4

Closes the active drawing window without exiting the program. If you have made changes to the drawing, a message prompts whether you want to save the changes. To save the changes, choose Ys . If you do not want to save the changes, choose No. To return to the drawing, choose Cancel.

If this is a new drawing, you have not named it, and you choose Yes to save it, the Save As dialog box appears for you to name the drawing.

  Command List


Command Bar

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: View > Command Bar

Keyboard: CMDBAR

Shortcut: F3

Turns the command bar on and off. When you turn it on, the program prompts you for where to position the command bar on the screen.

Floating · Lower · Upper · <Show Command Bar>: To toggle the visibility of the command bar, press Enter. To float the command bar anywhere on the screen, choose Floating. To dock the command bar near the bottom of the program window (just above the status bar), choose Lower. To dock the command bar near the top of the program window (below the toolbars), choose Upper.

To allow more screen space, move the toolbars next to the docked command bar, which reduces the width of the command bar.

When the command bar is floating, you can resize it by dragging its edges. When you stretch the height of the command bar, it displays more than three lines of text.

  Command List


Color

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Settings > Colors > Select Color ( [image])

Keyboard: COLOR

Alias: COLOUR

Establishes the color for all entities that you draw after you choose the command. The new color is displayed on the status line.

Color for drawing new entities <BYLAYER>: You can enter a numeric value, the name of the color, BYBLOCK, or BYLAYER.

To enter a numeric value

Enter the color number from the color palette (1-255), 0 for BYLAYER, or 256 for BYBLOCK.

To enter the name of a standard color

Select the name of the standard color. The seven standard color names are red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta, and white.

Color names are displayed in the prompt box that appears after you choose the Color command. You can select a color name by typing the first letter of the color you want as it appears in the prompt box and then pressing Enter.

To set color to BYLAYER

To draw all entities in the default color set for the current layer, choose BYLAYER.

To set color to BYBLOCK

To draw entities in the default color (white or black, depending on your system settings) until they are grouped into a block, choose BYBLOCK. After you insert the block into a drawing, it assumes the current color for new entities.

If a block contains a mixture of colors, inserting blocks when the color is set to BYBLOCK can produce unpredictable results.

  Command List


Cone

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Cone ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Cone

Keyboard: CONE

Alias: AI_CONE

Draws a three-dimensional cone, with a circular or elliptical cone and a symmetrical or offset tip.

A	Specify the radius of the base of the cone by selecting two points.

B	Specify the height of the cone by selecting two points.

Elliptical · Divisions · <Center of base of cone> <value>: Specify the center point of the base of the cone. For a cone with an elliptical base, choose Elliptical. To specify the number of divisions (tessellation lines that define the surface of the cone), choose Divisions.

Diameter · <Radius of base>: Enter the radius of the base of the cone, or specify a second point to indicate the radius. To specify the diameter of the base, choose Diameter and then enter the diameter or specify two points.

Apex · <Height of cone>: Enter the height of the cone or specify two points. For a cone with an offset top, choose Apex.

To specify the number of divisions

Choose Divisions.

Number of Divisions <value>: Specify the number of divisions, usually between 4 and 20. A large number of divisions slows the program considerably. A small number of divisions makes the cone unrecognizable.

To draw a cone with an elliptical base

Choose Elliptical.

Center · <First end of ellipse axis>: Specify the first end of an ellipse representing the base of the cone. This ellipse is drawn based on the length of one axis and the half-length of the second axis. To draw the elliptical base based on a center point and the endpoints of the minor and major axes, choose Center.

To draw a cone with an apex tip

Choose Apex.

Apex of cone: Specify a point for the apex (tip) of the cone.

  Command List


Options

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Tools > Options

Keyboard: CONFIG

Aliases: PR, OPTIONS, RCONFIG, PREFERENCES

Displays the Options dialog box so you can specify the default settings (such as Experience Level, Axis Color, and Search Paths) that you want the program to use.

Dialog box control	Description

Search Path	Defines the folders that will be searched when importing files, inserting blocks, or finding fonts. The syntax is the same as Windows paths, using drive letters, colons, and backslashes. You can also use Universal Naming Convention (UNC) paths. To specify more than one path, separate them with semicolons, such as:

C:\IntelliCAD\Support;C:\

Prototype drawing	Specifies a drawing file to use as the default template for new drawings when one is created with either the New or New Drawing Wizard command. This must be a DWG file. To select a prototype drawing, click Browse, locate the file name, and then click Open.

AutoSave	Enable AutoSave turns the automatic file saving feature on or off. When on, AutoSave creates a backup of the drawing at specified time intervals, defined in minutes in the Time field. The default is 30 minutes; selecting a value of 0 minutes is the same as turning AutoSave off. The backup file is named using the extension defined in the MyDrawing field, which is .SV$ by default.

NOTE Do not use too brief a time for AutoSave with large drawings, because it can take a minute or more to save a very large drawing.

Experience Level	Sets the difficulty level for menus and toolbars. The number and complexity of commands displayed on menus and toolbars increases from Beginner to Advanced. Select the experience level that is right for you based on your level of experience with CAD (computer-aided design). The default value, Intermediate, is set during installation.

TIP The Customize command determines which toolbar buttons and menu items are displayed by each experience level.

Command Lines to Track	Defines the maximum number of lines that are displayed in the Prompt History Window. As you enter commands, IntelliCAD tracks each one that you use in a session, the prompts that are displayed, and your responses to the prompts You can review this information the Prompt History window. The default value is 256.

Display Prompt Boxes	Turns Prompt Boxes on or off. The Prompt Boxes, typically displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, list options for commands. The options in the Prompt Box are the same as those displayed on the status bar and the command bar. Turning Prompt Boxes off may save screen space and may minimize mouse clicks.

Automatic Menu Loading	When turned on, default menus are loaded when you open drawing files. When turned off, you can load drawings with associated menus without overwriting the default menus.

X Axis Color	Defines the x-axis color for the pointer crosshairs. Click Select Color to display a palette of colors from which to choose. The default color is red.

Y Axis Color	Defines the y-axis color for the pointer crosshairs. Click Select Color to display a palette of colors from which to choose. The default color is green.

Z Axis Color	Defines the z-axis color for the pointer crosshairs. Click Select Color to display a palette of colors from which to choose. The default color is blue.

Graphic Screen Color	Sets the color of the background screen, which is Black by default.

  Command List


Coordinate

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > User Coordinate Systems ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Inquiry > ID Coordinates

Keyboard: COORDINATE

Shortcut: F6

Changes the coordinate display on the status line: on, off, and relative coordinates.

To turn on coordinate display

Coordinates are off: ON • Angle/Distance • <OFF>: To turn on the real-time display of x,y,z-coordinates on the status line, enter ON. For example:

2.3456, 3.4567, 0.0000

The z-coordinate usually displays 0, unless you set the elevation to a nonzero value, or you are drawing a 3D entity.

To display relative coordinates:

Coordinates are on: OFF • Angle/Distance • <ON>: To have coordinates displayed in relative polar coordinates, choose Angle/Distance. For example:

Length = 1.2345 @ Angle = 45.6789

The relative polar coordinates are only displayed during a drawing command.

To turn off the coordinate display:

Coordinates are set to Angle/Distance: ON • OFF • <Angle/Distance>: To turn off the real-time display of coordinates, enter OFF. The coordinate display is updated each time you click the screen.

TIP Use the DDUNITS command to change the format of the coordinates, length, and angle displayed on the status bar.

  Command List


Copy Entity

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Copy ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Copy

Keyboard: COPY

Aliases: CO, CP

Shortcut: Ctrl+C

Draws a duplicate of the selected entities. You can draw multiple copies from a single selection, and you can specify the base and displacement points. The entities you select to copy are not moved from their original location. The entities you copy maintain all the attributes (such as linetype, color, and layer) of the original entities.

A Select the entity you want to copy. B Specify the base point. C Specify the displacement point for the copy.	Result.
Select entities to copy: Select the entities you want to copy.

Multiple · Vector · <Base point>: Specify the base point to use for placement of the copies. To make multiple copies of the selected entities, choose Multiple. To specify the location of the copies using x,y,z-coordinates, choose Vector.

To copy entities by selecting the base point

A Select the entity you want to copy. B Specify the base point. C Specify the displacement point for the copy.	Result.
Choose Base point. The base point need not be anywhere near the entity being copied.

Displacement point: Specify the point of displacement.

To copy the entity by a displacement relative to the x,y,z plane, press Enter. The copy of the entity is placed at a point that is the difference between the point you used to select the entity and the base point you selected.

To copy entities by selecting the x,y,z coordinates

Choose Vector.

Multiple · <Direction vector (x,y,z)>: Enter the x,y,z value for the location of the copies.

If you enter a value of 3,3,2, the copied entities are placed at a distance of 3 units in the x direction, 3 units in the y direction, and 2 units in the z direction.

To create multiple copies of the selected entities

A Select the entity you want to copy. B Specify the base point of the entity you want to copy. C Specify the displacement point for the first copy. D Specify the displacement point for the second copy. E Specify the displacement point for the third copy.	Result.
Choose Multiple.

Vector · <Base point>: Specify the base point used for placement of the copies. To specify the location of the copies using x,y,z-coordinates, choose Vector.

To copy an entity along a path, use the Divide or Measure commands with the Block option. To copy an entity in a rectangular or polar pattern, use the Array or 3darray commands.

  Command List


Copy to Clipboard

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Copy ( [image])

Menu: Edit > Copy

Keyboard: COPYCLIP

Shortcut: Ctrl+C

Copies the selection to the Windows Clipboard. You can paste the selection into another drawing or into another program.

Select entities to copy to the clipboard: Select the entities you want to copy. The entities are copied to the Clipboard in the following formats:

Format	Description

Picture	WMF (Windows metafile), a vector format.

Bitmap	BMP, a raster format.

Enhmetafile	EMF (enhanced metafile), a vector format.

IntelliCAD	The native vector format of the program.

Object Descriptor	Used by ActiveX v2.

DIB	Device-independent bitmap, a raster format.

To paste the drawing in a specific format, use the Edit > Paste Special command. For example, you can paste the drawing in picture (WMF or EMF) format to create a two-dimensional version of a three-dimensional drawing. Or you can select Bitmap format to paste the drawing into a raster editing program.

  Command List


Copy Entity Data

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Data > Copy Entity Data ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Entity Data > Copy Entity Data

Keyboard: COPYEDATA

Copies entity data of the selected entities.

Copy Entity Data: ? to list application names · <Name of application>: Enter the name of the program that created the entity data. To specify all programs, enter *. To see a list of program names registered in the current drawing, press ?.

Select entity from which to copy Entity Data: Select the entity containing the entity data you want to copy.

Select entities to which Entity Data will be copied: Select the entities to which you want to copy the entity data. If the entity to which you are copying contains entity data, you are prompted whether you want to overwrite existing entity data. Choose Yes to overwrite existing entity data, or choose No to keep the existing entity data.

You can attach entity data to any entity. Standard data associated with an entity consists of layer, linetype, color, linetype scale, and so on. There is also data that is specific to the type of entity, such as the start and end points of a line, the diameter of a circle, and so on. In addition, you can add program-specific data to entities. Multiple programs can add data to the same entity. You can move or copy this data to other entities, and you can delete the data associated with a specific entity.

  Command List


Copy History

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: COPYHIST

Copies the text of the Prompt History window to the Windows Clipboard.

Text is copied to the Clipboard in the following formats:

Format	Description

Text	Characters with a hard return terminating each line; no formatting, such as font, size, or margins, is included.

Locale	Defines the (human) language format of the text.

Oemtext	Same as the Text format, except that the Clipboard Viewer displays the text with a proportional font. Other programs detect no difference between Text and Oemtext.

When you paste this text back into the drawing, the program processes it as if it were a script. When you use the Edit > Paste Special command in other programs, you see only one option: Unformatted Text.

  Command List


Customize

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Tools > Customize

Keyboard: CUSTOMIZE

Displays the Customize dialog box. You can use the Customize dialog box to change menus, toolbars, keyboard shortcuts, and aliases.

The dialog box has five options common to all four tabs:

Close Saves the changes you made and closes the dialog box.

Import Imports a customization file into the program, replacing the current customization. The program imports the following file formats:

Customization	File	Description

Menus	ICM	IntelliCAD menu source file

MNU	AutoCAD menu source file

MNS	AutoCAD Release 13 and 14 menu source file

Toolbars	MNU	AutoCAD menu source file

Keyboard	ICK	IntelliCAD keyboard source file

Aliases	ICA	IntelliCAD alias source file

PGP	AutoCAD alias source file

Export Exports a customization file, which can be edited or used with another license of the program. The program exports the following formats:

Customization	File	Description

Menus	ICM	IntelliCAD menu source file

Toolbars	None.

Keyboard	ICK	IntelliCAD keyboard source file

Aliases	ICA	IntelliCAD alias source file

PGP	AutoCAD alias source file

Reset Resets all customization to its default state, the same as when the program was first installed.

Click the Menus tab.

To add an item to the menu

Dialog box control	Description

Menu Tree:	The Menu Tree has an interface similar to the Windows Explorer interface. It displays the names of items on the menu bar, with a plus sign (+) next to each name. Click the plus sign to expand the tree to show the menu sub-items.

Insert:	In the Menu Tree, click the name of an item where you want to add a menu item. The program adds an item above your selection. Select the type of menu item you want to insert: Menu Item (a command), Menu Sub-Item (a sub-menu), Spacer (a line between menu items), Context Menu Item (the menu that appears when you right-click the mouse), or Context Menu Sub-Item (a sub-menu on the context menu). Type the name of the Menu Item or Sub-Item.

Available Command:	This list box displays the names of all commands and options in the program. Select a command, and then click Add Command.

Add Command:	Adds the command to the Command text box.

Options:	To change the options associated with the menu item, click Options. The Menu Customization Options dialog box is displayed.

Command:	Contains the command carried out when the menu item is selected. May contain a macro (one or more commands and their options).

Help String:	Type a one-sentence description of the menu item. The help string appears on the status line.

To specify options for menu customization

Click Options.

Dialog box control	Description

User Level:	Select the user levels you want for this menu item: Beginner, Intermediate, or Advanced. For example, if you check Advanced , this menu item does not appear if the user selects Beginner or Intermediate. Checking all three options sets the menu item to appear at all user levels. You can also set user levels with the CONFIG command.

MDI Window:	Select the number of drawing windows that must be open for this menu item to appear. If you want the menu item to appear only when at least one window is open, check At Least One Open. If you want the menu item to appear when no windows are open, check No Windows Open. Checking both options means the menu item always appears.

ActiveX In-Place Activation:	Select the type of ActiveX editing with which the menu item is to appear. If you want the menu item to appear during embedded server editing, check Server, Embedded. If you want the menu item to appear during in-place server editing, check Server, In-place. If you want the menu item to appear during container editing, check Container.

Context Menu Entity Availability:	To display the context menu, click an entity so that the green handles appear. When you right-click the entity, the context menu appears. You can select whether the menu item appears in the context menu when a specific entity is selected. To select all entities, check the All Entities check box.

Exclude from Multiple Entity Selection:	If you do not want the menu item to appear in the context menu when more than one entity is selected, click this check box.

Context Menu Exclusive:	If you want the menu item to appear only in the context menu, click this check box.

Checked-State Variable:	This feature is useful for toggle commands, such as Fill. When the specified system variable is on, a check mark appears next to the menu item. For the Fill command, the checked-state is Fillmode = 1 (on).

Grayed-State Variable:	This feature is useful for a command that is unavailable at certain times. In that case, the menu item is dimmed. For example, the Save command may be dimmed when Dwgmod = 0 (off), which means the drawing has not been modified.

To rename a menu item

Dialog box control	Description

Rename:	Select a menu item from the Menu Tree list. Click Rename. Type a new name for the menu item.

To delete a menu item

Dialog box control	Description

Delete:	Select a menu item from the Menu Tree list. Click the Delete button. The program prompts whether you are sure you want to remove the item. To remove it, choose Yes. To keep it, choose No.

Click the Toolbars tab.

A toolbar consists of a row of icons (small pictures) that identify its command. You can modify existing toolbars and create new toolbars.

Dialog box control	Description

Buttons:	Displays the tools contained on that toolbar.

To create a new toolbar

Dialog box control	Description

Categories:	Toolbar icons are sorted by categories. Each category represents the name of a toolbar. Select a category, and then drag an icon out of the dialog box. The program creates a toolbar, called Toolbar 1, containing the button you selected. You can drag additional buttons into your new toolbar from any category.

Insert as Flyout:	If you want one or more additional buttons added as flyouts, check this box.

Options:	To change the options associated with the button you have created, click Options. The Toolbar Customization Options dialog box is displayed.

ToolTip:	Type a word or two that describes the command you want for the new button. The ToolTip appears when a user pauses the cursor over the button.

Help String:	Type a phrase that describes the command. The help string appears on the status line.

Command:	Type the command to be carried out when a user clicks the button. You can also type a macro (two or more commands), such as:
^C^C^CZOOM;E;MSNAPSHOT

To specify options for toolbar customization

Click Options.

Dialog box control	Description

User Level:	Select the user levels with which you want this button associated: Beginner, Intermediate, or Advanced. For example, if you check Beginner and Intermediate, this button will not appear when the user selects Advanced. If you check all three options, the button will appear for all three user levels. You can also select user levels with the CONFIG command.

MDI Window:	Select the number of drawing windows must be open for this button to appear. Check At Least One Open for the button to appear only when at least one window is open. Check No Windows Open if you want the button to appear when no windows are open. Checking both options means the button will always appear.

ActiveX In-Place Activation:	Select the type of ActiveX editing that the button is to appear with. Check Server, Embedded if you want the button to appear during embedded server editing. Check Server, In-place if you want the button to appear during in-place server editing. Check Container if you want the button to appear during container editing.

Update parent image:	(Used only with flyouts.) When a button is selected from a flyout, there are two possibilities. Check this box if you want the selected button to appear as the top button for the flyout. Or, leave the box unchecked if you want the original button can stay on top of the flyout.

Button Bitmaps:	These list boxes let you select the bitmap (icon) displayed on the face of the button. You can specify buttons for four situations: small (default) or large buttons and color (default) or black-white buttons. Click the ... button to load a BMP (raster bitmap) file via the Select Bitmap file dialog box. You can create BMP files for buttons using an raster editing program, such as Paint.

Pressed-state variable:	This is useful for toggle commands, such as Center entity snap. When the specified system variable is on, the button is pressed. For the Center command, the pressed-state is Osmode = 4 (center snap = on).

Grayed-state variable:	This is useful for toggle commands, such as Fill. When the specified system variable if off, the button is grayed-out or off. For the Fill command, the grayed-state is Fillmode=0 (off).

Click the Keyboard tab.

Using a keyboard shortcut, you can carry out a command with a single keystroke. Unlike an alias or command name, you do not need to press Enter to carry out the command.

Dialog box control	Description

Defined keys	Lists the currently defined shortcut keystrokes.

Available commands	Lists the names of all commands available in the program.

To add a new keyboard shortcut

Dialog box control	Description

New:	Click New.

Press new shortcut key:	Press the keystroke combination you want for the command. The program adds the keystrokes to the list of Defined Keys. Allowable keyboard shortcut keys are:

All function keys, F1 through F12

All cursor control keys, such as up, down, page up, Home, and Ins.

The Ctrl, Alt, and Shift keys in conjunction with any alphanumeric key (A - Z and 0 - 9) and function key (F1 - F12), such as Ctrl+A and Alt+F11. You can combine the Ctrl, Alt, and Shift keys, such as Ctrl+Alt+Shift+B. The Shift key must be used with the Ctrl, Alt, and/or function keys.

Add Command:	Select a command from the list of Available Commands. A quick way to get to the command you want is to press the first letter, such as Z to get to the Zoom command. Then click the Add Command button.

Command:	You can edit the command macro. For example, you can remove the ^C^C^C (which cancels a command in progress) or add other commands, such as:
^C^C^CZOOM;E;QSAVE;QPRINT

To remove a keyboard shortcut

Dialog box control	Description

Delete:	Select the keystroke from the list of Defined Keys, and then click Delete.

Click the Aliases tab.

An alias is a shortcut that lets you specify a command. Any command can be specified using one or two letters. For example, L is the alias for the Line command. Type the alias, and then press Enter.

To create a new alias

Dialog box control	Description

New:	To specify a new alias, click New. The Alias text field becomes available.

Alias:	Type one or more letters (A - Z) or numbers (0 - 9) for your alias.

Available Commands:	Lists all of the available commands.

Assign:	Select a command from the Available Commands list, and then click the Assign button.

Command:	Remains dimmed because an alias can consist of only a single command.

To remove an alias

Dialog box control	Description

Aliases:	Lists all of the aliases already defined in the program.

Delete:	To removes an alias from the list, select an alias name from the list and click Delete.

Command:	Remains dimmed because an alias can consist of only a single command.

To revert back to the program's original settings, click Reset.

  Command List


Cut to Clipboard

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Cut ( [image])

Menu: Edit > Cut

Keyboard: CUTCLIP

Shortcut: Ctrl+X

Cuts (removes) the selection from your drawing and places it on the Windows Clipboard. You can paste the selection into another location in the drawing, into another drawing, or into another program.

Select entities to cut to the clipboard: Select the entities you want cut. The entities are copied to the Clipboard in the following formats:

Format	Explanation

Picture	WMF (Windows metafile), a vector format.

Bitmap	BMP, a raster format.

Enhmetafile	EMF (enhanced metafile), a vector format.

IntelliCAD	The native vector format of the program.

Object Descriptor	Used by OLE v2.

DIB	Device-independent bitmap, a raster format.

To paste the drawing in a specific format, use the Edit > Paste Special command. For example, you can paste the drawing in picture (WMF or EMF) format to create a two-dimensional version of a three-dimensional drawing.

  Command List


Cylinder

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Cylinder ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Cylinder

Keyboard: CYLINDER

Draws a three-dimensional cylinder with a round or elliptical cross-section and vertical or slanted sides.

A	Specify the radius of the cylinder.

B	Specify the height of the cylinder.

Elliptical · Divisions · <Center of base of cylinder> <0,0,0>: Specify the center of the base of the cylinder. Choose Elliptical for a cylinder with an elliptical cross-section. Choose Divisions to specify the number of divisions (tessellation lines that define the surface of the cylinder).

Diameter · <Radius of cylinder>: Enter the radius of the base of the cylinder, or specify a second point to indicate the radius. To specify the diameter of the base, choose Diameter, and then enter the diameter or specify two points.

Center of second end · <Height of cylinder>: To create a vertical cylinder, enter the height of the cylinder, or specify two points to indicate the height. For a cylinder with a slanted wall, enter C to specify the center point for the second end.

To draw a cylinder by specifying the diameter

Choose Diameter.

Diameter of cylinder: Specify the diameter of the cylinder.

Height of cylinder: Enter the height of the cylinder, or specify two points to indicate the height.

To specify the number of divisions

Choose Divisions.

Number of Divisions <value>: Specify the number of divisions, usually between 4 and 20. A large number of divisions takes the program longer to display the cylinder. A small number of divisions makes the cylinder unrecognizable.

To draw a cylinder with an elliptical base

Choose Elliptical.

Center · <First end of ellipse base>: Specify the first end of an ellipse representing the base of the cylinder. This ellipse is drawn based on the length of one axis and the half-length of the second axis. Choose Center to draw the elliptical base based on a center point and the endpoints of the minor and major axes.

  Command List


Database List

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: DBLIST

Lists the database information for every entity in the current drawing. Information is displayed in the Prompt History window. The information lists details on the entities (including attribute definitions), layers, colors, linetypes, and so on.

Press Enter to Continue... To continue the listing, press Enter, or press Esc to stop.

The database list is long. Using the List command to display similar information about selected entities may be more efficient.

  Command List


Define Attributes

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Tools > Define Attributes ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Define Attributes

Keyboard: DDATTDEF

Alias: AT

Displays the Define Attribute dialog box so you can define attributes (informational text) associated with a block.

Dialog box element	Description

Name:	Enter a name for the attribute. You can enter alphabetic and numerical characters without spaces. The attribute name is how you identify the attribute for editing and extraction purposes.

Prompt:	Enter a name for the prompt. You can enter alphabetic and numerical characters with spaces. Prompt text is displayed when the attribute is inserted into the drawing. The prompt is not necessary when the Attribute Flag is set to Fixed.

Default text:	Enter attribute text. You can enter alphabetic and numerical characters with spaces. The default text is the default value for the attribute; you can override it when you insert the attribute into the drawing.

Insert Coordinates:	Specify the x,y,z-coordinates for the insertion point of the attribute text. The program defaults to the coordinates stored in the Lastpoint system variable.

Select:	To specify the insertion point in a drawing, click Select. The dialog box disappears temporarily and the program prompts you to specify a point. The dialog box then reappears.

Attribute Flags:	To create an attribute that is not displayed in the drawing, select Hidden. (Hidden attributes can be forced to display with the On option of the Attribute Display command.) To create an attribute with preset values, select Fixed. If you select Fixed, you are not prompted for a value during insertion, and you cannot edit the value of the attribute. To create an attribute that prompts you to confirm the value you type, select Validate. To create an attribute that automatically takes on its default value, select Defined. If you select Defined, you can edit the value later with the Edit Block Attributes command.

Text:	Specify the text style, justification, text height, and rotation angle for the attribute text. The program defaults to the rotation angle stored in the Lastangle system variable. To specify the text height and rotation angle on the drawing, click Select. The dialog box disappears temporarily and the program prompts you to specify a point. The dialog box then reappears.

Define:	To place more than one attribute, select Define. Additional attributes are automatically placed below the preceding attribute, unless you specify different insertion coordinates.

Define and Exit:	To place the attribute and exit the dialog box, select Define and Exit.

After you have defined the attribute(s), you must use the Block command to convert the attribute text into a block, and then you must use either the Insert or the Block command to insert the attribute into the drawing.

  Command List


Edit Block Attributes

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Tools > Edit Block Attributes ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Edit Block Attributes

Keyboard: DDATTE

Alias: ATE

Displays the Edit Block Attributes dialog box so you can edit the values of the attributes (informational text) associated with a single block.

Select a block with attributes: Select a block that has defined attributes. The Edit Block Attributes dialog box is displayed.

Block: Name of the selected block. To change the name of the block, use the Explore Blocks command.

Dialog box element	Description

Name:	Name of the attribute, which cannot be edited.

Prompt:	The prompt for the attribute, which cannot be edited.

Value:	The value of the attribute.

Value:	Select an attribute name from the list above, then edit the value in this text field. When you have finished changing the values, click OK. To discard the changes and keep the attribute values as they were, click Cancel.

TIP To edit the attributes of more than one block at a time, use the Attribute Edit command.

  Command List


Edit Text

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Edit Text ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Edit Text

Keyboard: DDEDIT

Modifies the properties of selected text entities.

Select entity to modify: Select the text you want to edit. The Entity Properties dialog box displays the properties for the selected text. The tabs that appear on the dialog box depend on the type of text you selected.

  Command List


Extract Attributes

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Tools > Extract Attributes ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Extract Attributes

Keyboard: DDATTEXT

Displays the Attribute Extract dialog box so you can extract attribute data (informational text) to a DXF or TXT file on disk.

Dialog box element	Description

Select:	To select one or more blocks containing attributes, click Select. The dialog box temporarily disappears and you are prompted to select entities. Select only blocks containing attributes; any other entity is rejected, including a block containing no attributes.

Format of Extracted Text File:	To export the attributes in DXF format, select Extract in Drawing Exchange Format; no template drawing is required. To export attributes in a format where commas separate values, select Extract in Comma Delimited Format. To export attributes in a format where spaces separate values, select Extract in Space Delimited Format.

Template File:	Specify the name of the template file, which is required for Comma Delimited and Space Delimited formats. No template file is used by the DXF export format. You must create a template file before you use the Extract Attributes command. To select the file name from the Attribute Extract Template File dialog box, click Browse.

Output File:	Specify the name of the output file, which is required for all formats. To select the file name from the Attribute Extract Output File dialog box, click Browse.

Extract:	To extract attributes from the selected blocks, click Extract.

TIP Before you can extract an attribute, you must take two actions: (1) you must insert the attributes into the drawing as a block; and (2) you must define the template file.

  Command List


Insert Block

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Insert Block ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Insert Block

Keyboard: DDINSERT

Alias: I

Displays the Insert Block dialog box so blocks can be placed into the current drawing. You can insert a single block or a rectangular array of blocks.

TIP You can also use the Drawing Explorer to insert blocks into a drawing.

Dialog box element	Description

From file:	Select to insert a drawing file as a block. Any DWG file can be used as a block.

Browse:	Select to display the Insert Block dialog box. Select a file with the DWG extension, and then click Open.

Block name:	Select the name of an internal block to insert. The list contains the names of all blocks

Position the block when inserting:	Click the check box to select it if you want the program to prompt you for the insertion point, scale factor, and rotation angle at the command bar. The following options are only available when this is not checked.

Insertion point:	Specify the x,y,z-coordinates of the insertion point for the block. The default value is stored in system variable Lastpoint.

Select:	Click to specify an insertion point in the drawing for the block'. The dialog box temporarily disappears, and you are prompted to specify an insertion point. Specify a point, and then the dialog box returns. The x,y-coordinates are updated to reflect the point you specified; the z-coordinate takes on the value stored in system variable Elevation.

Scale factor:	Specify the scale factor for the block. The default value is 1.0; a value less than 1 results in a smaller block; a value larger than 1 results in a larger block. A negative value mirrors (reverses) the block. You can scale the block independently in the x, y, and z directions.

Rotation Angle:	Specify the rotation of the block. The default is 0 degrees.

Explode block upon insertion:	Click the check box to select it if you want the block exploded into its constituent parts. This is the equivalent to using the Insert Block command followed by the Explode command.

Columns:	Select the number of columns of blocks. The default is 1.

Columns Spacing:	Specify the spacing between columns of blocks. The default is 1.0 units.

Rows:	Select the number of rows of blocks. The default is 1.

Row Spacing:	Specify the spacing between rows of blocks. The default is 1.0 units.

TIP The array of blocks is itself a block.

  Command List


Delay

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: DELAY

Delays carrying out the next command for a specified time.

Milliseconds to delay: Enter a numeric value specifying the amount of time you want to delay carrying out the next command.

TIP A value of 1,000 is equivalent to a delay of approximately one second. This command is usually used within a script file.

  Command List


Delete Entity Data

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Data > Delete Entity Data ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Entity Data > Delete Entity Data

Keyboard: DELEDATA

Deletes program-specific entity data that is attached to an entity.

Delete Entity Data: ? to list application names · <Name of application>: Enter the name of the program whose entity data you want to delete. To list the names of programs found in the current drawing, enter ?.

Select entities to delete Entity Data: Select the entities for which you want to delete entity data. The program does not warn you that the data will be erased.

Every entity contains a common set of data, such as the layer, linetype, color, and linetype scale. In addition, each entity has data specific to that entity, such as the start and end points off a line or the diameter of a circle. In addition to these two types of data, you can add program-specific data to entities. Multiple programs can add data to the same entity. You can move or copy this data to other entities, and you can delete the data associated with a specific entity.

  Command List


Delete

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Delete ( [image])

Menu: Edit > Delete

Keyboard: DELETE

Shortcut: Del

Alias: E, ERASE

Deletes selected entities from the drawing.

Select entities to delete: Select the entities you want to delete, and then press Enter.

Deleted entities are removed from the drawing database. If you unintentionally delete an entity, you can use UNDELETE immediately after using Delete to restore it. To return entities that you deleted several commands previously, use the UNDELETE command.

  Command List


Dimension Aligned

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Dimensioning > Aligned ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Dimensions > Aligned

Keyboard: DIMALIGNED

Alias: DAL, DIMALI

Adds dimensions that are aligned to entities.

Enter to select entity · <Origin of first extension line>: Specify the point for the first extension line, or to select an entity, press Enter.

To manually create the dimension line by selecting points

A Specify the first point for the extension line. B Specify the second point. C Move the pointer to locate the dimension text.	Result.
Specify the point for the first extension line.

Origin of second extension line: Specify the point for the second extension line.

To automatically create the dimension line by selecting an entity

A Select the entity you want to dimension. B Move the pointer to locate the dimension text	Result.
Press Enter.

Select entity to dimension: Select the entity to which you want to add dimensions. The entity must be a line segment, circle, arc, or polyline.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Specify two points to indicate the location and the angle of the dimension line. To specify the angle of the dimension text, choose Angle. To change the dimension text, choose Text.

To change the angle of the text

Choose Angle.

Angle of text: Enter the angle of rotation for the text included within the dimension.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Specify the location of the dimension line. To change the angle of the text, choose Angle. To change the text included in the dimension, choose Text.

To change the text

Choose Text.

Dimension text <3.6667>: The dimensions of the selected entity are displayed as the default setting. To change the text within the dimension line, type new text and then press Enter.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Specify the location of the dimension line. To specify the angle of the text, choose Angle.

  Command List


Dimension Angular

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Dimensioning > Angular ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Dimensions > Angular

Keyboard: DIMANGULAR

Alias: DAN, DIMANG

Annotates the angle between two selected entities, or of a circle or an arc.

Press ENTER to specify angle · <Select line, arc, or circle>: Select an entity. To specify the angle of the annotation, press Enter, or right-click the mouse.

To annotate the angle of two lines

A Select the first line of the angle you want to dimension. B Select the second line. C Move the pointer to locate the dimension text.	Result.
Select the first line.

Other line for angular dimension: Select the second entity to include in the dimension.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension arc>: Specify the location of the dimension arc and text. To specify the angle of the text within the dimension line, choose Angle. To change the dimension text, choose Text.

To annotate an arc

A Select the arc you want to dimension. B Move the pointer to locate the dimension text.	Result.
Select the arc, and then move the pointer to locate the dimension text.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension arc>: Specify the location of the dimension arc and text. To specify the angle of the text within the dimension line, choose Angle. To change the dimension text, choose Text.

To annotate a circle

A Select the circle you want to dimension. B Specify the angle, and then move the pointer to locate the dimension text.	Result.
Select the circle.

Other side of angle: Specify the other side of the angle you want to dimension, and then move the pointer to locate the dimension text.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension arc>: Specify the location of the dimension arc and text. To specify the angle of the text within the dimension line, choose Angle. To change the dimension text, choose Text.

To change the angle of the text

Choose Angle.

Angle of text: Enter the angle of rotation for the text included within the dimension.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Specify the location of the dimension line. To change the text included in the dimension, choose Text.

To change the text

Choose Text.

Dimension text <value>: The dimensions of the selected entity are displayed as the default setting. To change the text within the dimension line, type new text and then press Enter.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Specify the location of the dimension line. To specify the angle of the text, choose Angle.

  Command List


Dimension Baseline

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Dimensioning > Baseline ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Dimensions > Baseline

Keyboard: DIMBASELINE

Alias: DBA, DIMBASE

Continues a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from a previous dimension. If no dimension was created in the previous session, you are prompted to select a linear, ordinate, or angular dimension to use as the base dimension. The program uses the first extension line of the base dimension as the first extension line for the next dimension.

Baseline: ENTER to select starting dimension · <Origin of next extension line>: To specify the origin of the next extension line, the default setting, specify a point. To select the starting dimension, press Enter.

To select the origin of the next extension line

Place a point for the origin of the next extension line.

Dimension text <value>: To accept the current value, press Enter. To change the dimension text, enter new text.

To select the starting dimension

A	Select the dimension you want to use as the baseline

B	Specify the origin of the next extension line.

C	Specify the origin of the next extension line, and so on.

Result

Select dimension for baseline: Select the dimension that you want to use as the baseline.

Baseline: ENTER to select starting dimension · <Origin of next extension line>: To specify the origin of the next extension line, the default setting, place a point. To select the starting dimension, press Enter.

Dimension text <value>: To accept the current value, press Enter. To change the dimension text, enter new text.

  Command List


Dimension Center Lines

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Dimensioning > Center Lines ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Dimensions > Center Lines

Keyboard: DIMCENTER

Alias: DCE

Places a marker at the center of a circle, arc, or polyline arc. No dimension text is included.

A	Select the circle to dimension.

B	The marker that is placed at the center of the circle.

Select arc or circle: Select an arc, a circle, or a polyline containing an arc.

You can change the size of the marker using the DIMCEN system variable. You can also use the SETDIM command to display the Dimension Settings dialog box.

  Command List


Dimension Continue

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Dimensioning > Continue ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Dimensions > Continue

Keyboard: DIMCONTINUE

Alias: DCO, DIMCONT

Continues a dimension. The program uses the final extension line of the starting dimension as the first extension line for the continued dimension.

A	Select the starting dimension.

B	Specify the point for the continued dimension.

C	Specify another point to continue the dimension, and so on.

Result

Continue: ENTER to select starting dimension · <Origin of next extension line>: Specify the start of the next extension line, or press Enter to select the starting dimension.

To specify the origin of the next extension line

Specify the start point of the next extension line.

Dimension text <value>: Enter the new dimension text, if any, or press Enter to accept the text displayed.

To select the starting dimension

Press Enter.

Select dimension to continue: Select the dimension to continue.

Continue: ENTER to select starting dimension · <Origin of next extension line>: Specify the start of the next extension line, or press Enter to select the starting dimension.

  Command List


Dimension Diameter

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Dimensioning > Diameter ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Dimensions > Diameter

Keyboard: DIMDIAMETER

Alias: DDI

Measures the diameter of a circle, arc, or polyline arc. You can position the diameter line at any angle inside or outside a circle or an arc.

A Select the circle you want to dimension. B Move the pointer to locate the dimension text.	Result.
Select arc or circle: Select the arc, circle, or polyline arc you want to measure.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Specify the location of the dimension line. To specify the angle of the dimension text, choose Angle. To change the dimension text, choose Text.

To change the angle of the text

Choose Angle.

Angle of text: Enter the angle of rotation for the text included within the dimension.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Specify the location of the dimension line. To change the text included in the dimension, choose Text. To change the angle of rotation, choose Angle.

To change the text

Choose Text.

Dimension text <value>: The dimensions of the selected entity are displayed as the default setting. To change the text within the dimension line, type new text and then press Enter.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Specify the location of the dimension line. To specify the angle of the text, choose Angle. To change the text included in the dimension, choose Text.

  Command List


Dimension Edit

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Dimensioning > Edit Dimension Text ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Dimensions > Edit Dimension Text

Keyboard: DIMEDIT

Alias: DED, DIMED

Edits dimension lines and text. You can change, rotate, or restore text, or you can oblique the extension lines.

Edit dimension: Edit text · Oblique lines · ROtate text · <REstore text>: To restore modified dimension text, press Enter. To edit text, choose Edit text. To oblique extension lines, choose Oblique lines. To rotate dimension text, choose ROtate text.

To edit dimension text

Choose Edit text.

New dimension text <>: Enter the new text. You can use the following codes to place special characters:

Code	Meaning

%%c	Center symbol

%%d	Degree symbol

%%p	Plus-minus symbol

<>	Original text.

You can also enter extended characters from the standard Microsoft Windows ANSI character set. Refer to the Microsoft Windows Character Map utility for more information on the characters that are supported.

Select dimensions to replace with new text: Select the dimension text you want to change.

To oblique extension lines

A dimension with oblique extension lines.

Choose Oblique lines.

Select linear dimensions to make oblique: Select the dimensions you want to change.

Enter obliquing angle: Enter the angle at which want to oblique lines.

TIP Oblique extension lines by 30 degrees for dimensions in isometric drawings.

To rotate text

An oblique dimension with rotated text.

Choose ROtate text.

Angle of dimension text: Enter the angle at which you want to rotate the text.

Select entity to rotate text: Select the dimensions to want to rotate.

  Command List


Dimension

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: DIMENSION

Alias: DIM, DIM1

Dimensions drawing entities in a variety of ways.

Dimensioning command: Choose the dimensioning command you want from the prompt box, or type a dimensioning command. To exit dimensioning mode and return to the command prompt, press the Esc key or type Exit.

While you are using dimensioning commands, you can also use the dimension-related commands listed in the following table. You do not need to type the letters "dim" preceding each command, and you can type an abbreviation of the command as shown here.

Command	Abbreviation	Explanation
Aligned	AL	Draws aligned linear dimension.
Angular	AN	Dimensions an angle.
Baseline	B	Continues a linear dimension from a base point.
Center	CE	Place a center mark.
Continue	CO	Continues a linear dimension.
Diameter	D	Diameter dimension.
Done	DO	Exit dimensioning mode.
Edit	ED	Edit dimension text and oblique lines.
Hometext	HOM	Returns dimension text to its default position.
Horizontal	HOR	Draws horizontal linear dimension.
Leader	LEA	Draws leader and text.
Newtext	N	Replace dimension text.
Oblique	OB	Oblique dimension lines.
Ordinate	OR	Ordinate dimensions.
Override	OV	Override dimension style.
Position	P	Reposition dimension text.
Radius	RA	Radius dimension.
Redraw	RED	Redraw the screen.
Restore	RES	Restores dimensions to the current style.
Rotated	RO	Draws rotated dimension.
Save	SA	Save dimension settings as a style.
Status	STA	Displays the status of dimension variables.
Style	STY	Selects another text style for dimension ext.
Trotate	TR	Rotates dimension text.
Undo	U	Undoes the last dimension command.
Update	UP	Apply dimension style to selected dimensions.
Variables	VA	List values of a specified dimension style.
Vertical	VE	Draw a vertical linear dimension.
  Command List


Dimension Leader

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Dimensioning > Leader ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Dimensions > Leader

Keyboard: DIMLEADER

Alias: LE, LEAD, LEADER

Draws a line, or sequence of lines, for controlled placement of dimension text. A leader has an arrowhead at its starting point and text at its ending point.

A	Select the start point of the leader.

B	Select the next point of the leader.

C	Select the end point of the leader.

Start of leader: Select the start point of the leader.

Next point: Select the next point of the leader. You can continue to specify additional points for the leader. To stop selecting points, press Enter.

Dimension text <value>: To accept the dimension text, press Enter. To change the dimension text, enter new text.

  Command List


Dimension Linear

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Dimensioning > Linear( [image])

Menu: Insert > Dimensions > Linear

Keyboard: DIMLINEAR

Alias: DLI, DIMLIN

Adds horizontal and vertical dimensions to entities.

ENTER to select entity · <Origin of first extension line>: Select the starting point of the first extension line, or press Enter to select the entity.

To manually create the dimension line by selecting points

A Select the origin of the first extension line. B Select the origin of the second extension line. C Move the pointer to position the leader and dimension text.	Result.
Origin of second extension line: Select the point for the second extension line.

Angle · Text · Orientation of dimension line: Horizontal · Vertical · Rotated: To add a horizontal dimension, choose Horizontal. To add a vertical dimension, choose Vertical. To add a rotated dimension, choose Rotate. To specify the angle of the dimension text, choose Angle. To change the dimension text, choose Text.

To automatically create the dimension line by selecting an entity

A Select the entity you want to dimension. B Move the pointer to position the leader and dimension text.	Result.
Angle · Text · Orientation of dimension line: Horizontal · Vertical · Rotated: To add a horizontal dimension, choose Horizontal. To add a vertical dimension, choose Vertical. To add a rotated dimension, choose Rotate. To specify the angle of the dimension text, choose Angle. To change the dimension text, choose Text.

To add a horizontal measurement

An example of a horizontal dimension.

Choose Horizontal.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Select the location of the dimension line. To change the angle of the dimension text, choose Angle. To change the dimension text, choose Text.

To add a vertical measurement

An example of a vertical dimension.

Choose Vertical.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Select the location of the dimension line. To change the angle of the dimension text, choose Angle. To change the dimension text, choose Text.

To add a rotated measurement

An example of a rotated dimension.

Choose Rotated.

Angle of dimension line <0>: Enter the angle of the rotated line.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Select the location of the dimension line. To change the angle of the dimension text, choose Angle. To change the dimension text, choose Text.

To change the angle of the text

An example of an oblique dimension with rotated text.

Choose Angle.

Angle of text: Enter the angle of rotation for the text included within the dimension.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Select the location of the dimension line. To change the angle of the dimension text, choose Angle. To change the text included in the dimension, choose Text.

To change the text

Choose Text.

Dimension text <value>: The dimensions of the selected entity are displayed as the default setting. To change the text within the dimension line, type new text and press Enter.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Select the location of the dimension line. To specify the angle of the text, choose Angle. To change the text included in the dimension, choose Text.

  Command List


Dimension Ordinate

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Dimensioning > Ordinate ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Dimensions > Ordinate

Keyboard: DIMORDINATE

Alias: DOR, DIMORD

Adds ordinate point dimensions.

An object dimensioned using ordinate point dimensions.

Select entity or point for ordinate dimension: Select the point for the ordinate dimension.

Text · X datum · Y datum · <Leader endpoint>: Move your pointer to specify the endpoint. To change the text, choose Text. To specify the x-coordinate, choose X datum. To specify the y-coordinate, choose Y datum.

To change the text

Choose Text.

Dimension text <>: To change the text associated with the ordinate dimension, type new text and then press Enter.

For x-datum only

Choose X datum

Endpoint of leader: Enter the endpoint for the x-datum leader.

Dimension text <>: To accept the default value or to enter a new value, press Enter.

For y-datum only

Choose Y datum

Endpoint of leader:  Enter the endpoint for the y-datum leader.

Dimension text <>: To accept the default value or to enter a new value, press Enter.

  Command List


Dimesion Override
Dimension Override

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: DIMOVERRIDE

Alias: DOV, DIMOVER

Overrides the style settings for a given set of dimensions. An "override" is a dimension variable whose value has been changed from the current dimension style.

Clear overrides · <Dimension variable to override>: Enter the name of the dimension variable to override. To clear the overrides on selected dimensions, enter C.

To override a dimension variable

Type the name of the dimension variable. The program reports the current value of the variable and prompts you to enter a new value. For example:

Dimension variable to override: dimscale

DIMSCALE is now 1.0000. New value: Enter a new value and then press Enter.

To clear overrides

Choose Clear overrides

Select dimensions to clear overrides: Select dimensions, and then press Enter. The program resets dimension variables to values set in the current dimension style.

  Command List


Dimension Radius

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Dimensioning > Radius ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Dimensions > Radius

Keyboard: DIMRADIUS

Alias: DRA, DIMRAD

Measures the radius of a circle, arc, or polyline arc. You can position the radius line to any angle.

A Select the circle you want to measure. B Select the location of the dimension line.	Result.
Select arc or circle: Select the arc, polyline arc, or circle you want to measure.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Select the location of the dimension line. To specify the angle of the dimension text, choose Angle. To change the dimension text, choose Text.

To change the angle of the text

Choose Angle.

Angle of text: Enter the angle of rotation for the text included in the dimension.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Select the location of the dimension line. To change the text included in the dimension, choose Text.

To change the text

Choose Text.

Dimension text <value>: The dimensions of the selected entity are displayed as the default setting. To change the text within the dimension line, type new text and then press Enter.

Angle · Text · <Location of dimension line>: Select the location of the dimension line. To specify the angle of the text, choose Angle.

  Command List


Dimension Style

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Dimensioning > Apply Style ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Dimensions > Restore Style

Keyboard: DIMSTYLE

Alias: DST, DIMSTY

Creates, changes, and saves dimension styles. After you enter the Dimension Style command, the program lists the name of the current dimension style, followed by the names of changed dimension variables. For example:

Current dimension style: STANDARD

Altered dimension style variables:

DIMSCALE = 2

DIMSTYLE = "STANDARD"

Dimension styles: ? to list styles · Apply · SAve · STatus · Variables · <Restore>: To load an existing dimension style, press Enter. To list the names of dimension styles currently loaded into the drawing, choose ?. To apply the current dimension style to selected dimensions, choose Apply. To save the current dimension settings as a new style name, choose SAve. To list the current values of all dimension-releated system variables, choose STatus.

To list currently loaded dimension styles

Choose ?

Dimension style(s) to list <*>: Press Enter to list all dimension styles currently available. Or enter a dimension style name. You can use? (match any single character) and * (match all characters) wildcards, such as ISO* or DIN-?.

Named dimension styles: The program lists the available dimension styles, then exits the Dimension Style command. By default, every drawing contains the dimension style named STANDARD.

To apply the current dimension style to selected dimensions

Choose Apply

Select one or more dimensions to which to apply the current style. Doing this overrides any changes you may have made to the dimension, such as moving dimension text or changing an arrowhead. It also overrides the variable settings specified by another dimension style.

To save the current dimension variable settings as a style

Choose SAve

Save style: ? to list styles · Name for new dimension style: Enter ? to list the names of dimension styles available in the current drawing. Enter a name to store the current settings of dimension variables as a dimension style. The name can be up to 31 alphanumeric characters.

Dimension style is now <name>. The name of the new dimension style is displayed and is now the current style.

To list dimension styles

? to list styles · ENTER to select dimension · <Dimension style>: To list the current settings of a dimension style,  enter its name.

To list the names of dimension styles currently available, press ?. To set the current style based on a selected dimension, press Enter.

To list the settings of dimension variables of a selected dimension

Choose Enter

Select dimension to use as current style: Select a dimension. The program lists all dimension variables and their current value. Following is an example of a partial listing:

Status of STANDARD

DIMADEC = -1

DIMALT = 0

DIMALTD = 2

  Command List


Dimension Reposition Text

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Dimensioning > Reposition Dimension Text ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Dimensions > Reposition Dimension Text

Keyboard: DIMTEDIT

Alias: DIMTED

Defines the position and angle of dimension text.

Select dimension to reposition text: Select the dimension text you want to reposition or change.

Enter text location: REstore · Angle · Left · Right: To restore the dimension text to the original position, choose REstore. To change the angle of the dimension text, choose Angle. To change the left or right orientation of the dimension text, choose Left or Right.

To change the angle of the text

Choose Angle.

Angle for dimension text: Enter the angle of rotation for the text included in the dimension.

  Command List


Dish

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Dish ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Dish

Keyboard: DISH

Alias: AI_DISH

Draws the lower half of a sphere The flat side of the sphere faces up.

A	Specify the radius of the dish.

Center of dish: Specify the center point of the dish.

Diameter · <Radius of dish>: To draw a dish based on its radius, enter the radius or specify a point. To draw a dish based on its diameter, choose Diameter and enter the diameter, or specify a point.

To draw a dish based on the diameter

A	Specify the diameter of the dish.

Diameter of dish: Enter the diameter of the dish, or specify a second point.

   Command List


Distance

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Inquiry > Distance ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Inquiry > Distance

Keyboard: DIST

Alias: DI

Measures the distance and angle between a first point and a second point.

A	Specify the start point of the distance you want to measure.

B	Specify the end point.

Starting point for distance: Specify the start point of the distance you want to measure.

End point: Specify the end point. In the command bar, the calculated distance, the angle measurements, and the x,y,z delta coordinates are displayed. If the z-coordinate value is omitted, the current elevation is used for the first or second point.

Distance inquiry command bar output.

  Command List


Divide

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Divide ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Divide

Keyboard: DIVIDE

Alias: DIV

Places markers along a selected entity. The markers evenly divide the entity into the specified number of equal parts. You can divide lines, arcs, circles, or polylines. The markers are point entities or blocks.

A Select the entity you want to divide.	Result.
Select entity to divide: Select the entity you want to divide.

Blocks · <Number of segments>: Enter the number of segments by which you want the selected entity divided.  The minimum is 2; the maximum is 32,767.

 To divide the entity using blocks (rather than point entities), choose Blocks.

To use blocks as division markers

To use a block as a division marker, the block must already exist.

A Select the entity you want to divide. B The blocks are placed equidistant along the entity.	Result.
Choose Blocks.

Name of block to insert: Enter the name of the block you want used to divide the entity.

Align blocks with entity? <Y>: To align the blocks with the entity being divided, choose Yes. This option places the x-axis of the block tangent to the entity. If you do not want the block aligned with the entity, choose No. This option aligns the blocks according to their normal orientation.

Number of segments: Enter the number of segments by which you want the entity divided. The minimum is 2; the maximum is 32,767.

  Command List


Dome

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Dome ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Dome

Keyboard: DOME

Alias: AI_DOME

Draws the upper half of a sphere. The flat side of the sphere faces down.

A	Specify the radius of the dome.

Center of dome: Specify the center point of the dome.

Diameter · <Radius of dome>: To draw a dome based on the radius, enter the radius or specify a point. To draw a dome based on the diameter, choose Diameter and enter the diameter, or specify a point.

To draw a dome based on the diameter

A	Specify the diameter of the dome.

Diameter of dome: Enter the diameter of the dome, or specify a second point.

  Command List


Donut

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Donut ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Donut

Keyboard: DONUT

Alias: DO, BAGEL, DOUGHNUT

Draws a filled circle or flat ring created as a polyline. You can use the system variable FILLMODE to specify if the donuts you create are filled.

2Point · 3Point · RadTanTan · <Inside diameter of donut> <value>: To draw a donut by specifying the inside and outside diameters, specify the first point of the inside diameter of the donut, or enter the diameter. To draw a donut using the two-point method, choose 2Point. To draw a donut using the three-point method, choose 3Point. To draw a donut by specifying the radius and two tangents, choose RadTanTan.

  Command List


To draw a donut by specifying inside and outside diameters

A	Specify the inside diameter of the donut.

B	Specify the outside diameter of the donut.

Specify the first point of the inside diameter of the donut, or enter the diameter. If you specify a point, you are prompted to specify a second point. To draw a filled circle, enter 0 (zero) for the inside diameter.

Outside diameter of donut <value>: Specify the first point of the outside diameter of the donut, or enter the diameter. If you specify a point, you are prompted to specify a second point.

Center of donut: Enter the center point to place the donut. The prompt repeats and you can continue to draw donuts until you choose Done or press Enter.

  Command List


To draw a donut using the 2-point method

A	Specify the width of the donut.

B	Specify a first point on the circumference of the donut.

C	Specify a second point on the circumference of the donut.

Choose 2Point.

Width of donut: Enter the width of the donut, or specify two points. (The width of a donut is the area between the inside and outside diameters.)

First point on diameter: Specify the first point of the diameter of the donut.

Second point on diameter: Specify a second point of the diameter of the donut.

  Command List


To draw a donut using the 3-point method

A	Specify the width of the donut.

B	Specify a first point on the circumference of the donut.

C	Specify a second point.

D	Specify a third point.

Choose 3Point.

Width of donut: Enter the width of the donut, or specify two points. (The width of the donut is the area between the inside and outside diameters.

First point on donut: Specify the first point of the donut.

Second point: Specify a second point.

Third point: Specify a third point.

  Command List


To draw a donut by specifying the radius and two tangential entities

A	Specify the width of the donut.

B	Specify the diameter of the donut.

C	Specify the two tangential entities.

Choose RadTanTan.

Width of donut <value>: Enter the width of the donut, or specify two points. (The width of a donut is the area between the inside and outside diameters.)

Diameter of donut <value>: Enter the diameter, or specify a point. (If you specify a point for the radius, you are prompted to specify a second point.)

Select first tangent point: Select the first entity that you want the donut to touch.

Select second tangent point: Select the second entity that you want the donut to touch.

  Command List


Dragmode

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: DRAGMODE

Switches the dragged-entity display between on, off, and auto.

ON · OFF · Auto <Auto>: To keep the default value, press Enter. To have the program automatically determine when to display a dragged image, choose Auto. To always display a dragged image, choose ON. To never display a dragged image, choose OFF.

Dragging a large number of entities slows the program significantly.

  Command List


Text (Paragraph)

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Text ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Text

Keyboard: DTEXT

Alias: DT

Creates text entities. Similar to TEXT except that you can enter multiple lines of text and separate them with a paragraph return. Text is drawn dynamically as you enter it in the command bar.

A	Specify the text height.

B	Specify the rotation angle of the text.

Text: Style · Align · Fit · Center · Middle · Right · Justify · <Start point>: To start typing left-justified text, specify the start point of the text. To specify the text style, choose Style. To change the alignment, choose Align, Fit, Center, Middle, Right, or Justify.

To insert text without additional formatting

Specify the start point of the text.

Height of text <value>: Enter the text height, or specify a point.

Rotation angle of text <0º>: Enter the rotation angle of the text, or specify a point.

Text: Type the text you want to insert. To insert multiple lines of text, press Enter at the end of each line. Text is inserted into your drawing as you type. To end the command, press Enter at the Text prompt.

TIP To continue text under the previous line, start the Draw Text command and press Enter until it displays the Text prompt.

To select a text style

Choose Style.

? To list available styles · <Text style> <STANDARD>: Enter the style name you want to use, or enter ? to list the styles. To use the default style, press Enter.

To specify text alignment

To force text to fit between two points, choose Align. The height of text is automatically adjusted by the program.

Text start point: Specify the start point of the text.

Text end point: Specify the end point of the text.

Text: Type the text you want to insert. When you press Enter to end the line of text, the text adjusts to fit within the space you selected. Additional lines of text are aligned within the dimensions you specified.

To specify text fit

To force text to fit between two points with a text height that you specify, choose Fit.

Text start point: Specify the start point of the text.

Text end point: Specify the end point of the text.

Height of text <value>: Enter the height of the text, or specify a point.

Text: Type the text you want to insert. When you press Enter to end the line of text, the text adjusts to fit within the dimensions and height you specified. Additional lines of text fit within those specifications.

To specify center alignment of text

Choose Center to align text at the center.

Center point of text: Specify the point around which you want text centered. Text that you enter aligns to the baseline of the center point.

Height of text <value>: Enter the height of the text, or specify a point.

Rotation angle of text <0°>: Enter the degree of rotation of the text, or specify a point.

Text: Type the text you want to insert. Text is centered as you type. Additional lines of text are centered at the same point.

To specify the middle point of text

Choose Middle.

Middle point of text: Specify the middle point of the text you want to insert. Text that you enter aligns to that point (left/right and top/bottom).

Height of text <value>: Enter the height of the text, or specify a point.

Rotation angle of text <0°>: Enter the degree of rotation of the text, or specify a point.

Text: Type the text you want to insert. Text is centered as you type. Additional lines of text are centered at the same point.

To specify right alignment of text

To right-align text, choose Right.

Right point of text: Specify the right-aligned point (text aligns to the left of this point).

Height of text <value>: Enter the height of the text, or specify a point.

Rotation angle of text <0°>: Enter the degree of rotation of the text, or specify a point.

Text: Type the text you want to insert. Text is aligned to the right as you type. Additional lines of text are right aligned at the same point.

To specify other text alignment points

Choose Justify.

Text: Style · Align · Fit · Center · Middle · Right · TL · TC · TR · ML · MC · MR · BL · BC · BR ·  <Start point>:

To specify top-left-aligned text, choose TL and specify the top-left point of the text.

To specify top-center-aligned text, choose TC and specify the top-center point of the text (the top of the text is centered at the point you specify).

To specify top-right-aligned text, choose TR and specify the top-right point of the text (the top of the text is right aligned at the point you specify).

To specify middle-left-aligned text, choose ML and specify the middle-left point of the text (the middle of the text is left aligned at the point you specify).

To specify middle-center-aligned of text, choose MC and specify the middle-center point of the text (the middle of the text is centered at the point you specify).

To specify middle-right-aligned text, choose MR and specify the middle-right point of the text (the middle of the text is right aligned at the point you specify).

To specify bottom-left-aligned text, choose BL and specify the bottom-left point of the text (the bottom of the text is left aligned at the point you specify).

To specify bottom-center-aligned text, choose BC and specify the bottom-center point of the text (the bottom of the text is centered at the point you specify).

To specify bottom-right-aligned text, choose BR and specify the bottom-right point of the text (the bottom of the text is right aligned at the point you specify).

Height of text <value>: Enter the height of the text, or specify a point.

Rotation angle of text <0°>: Enter the rotation of the text, or specify a point.

Text: Type the text you want to insert. The text aligns as you type. Additional lines of text are centered at the same point.

TIP The program supports the standard Windows ANSI character set. To enter an extended character, press Alt plus the numeric equivalent (be sure that Num Lock is turned on). For a list of the ANSI characters supported and their numeric equivalents, refer to the Character Map utility included with Windows.

  Command List


Define View

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Define View ( [image])

Menu: View > Define View

Keyboard: DVIEW

Alias: DV

Dynamically defines parallel or visual perspective views. Cameras and targets are used to dynamically view your three-dimensional drawing. You can specify the viewing direction between the camera and the target. The center point of the selected entites is considered the target.

Camera viewing direction and target.

ENTER for all entities · <Select entities to see in preview>: Select the entities you want to preview. To preview all entities, press Enter.

DVIEW: CAmera · TArget · TWist · Distance · POints · CLip · Off · Hide · PAn · Zoom · Undo · <eXit>: To quit dynamic viewing, press Enter or choose eXit. To rotate the camera around the target, choose CAmera. To rotate the target around the camera, choose TArget. To twist the view, choose TWist. To specify the camera's distance to the target, choose Distance. To specify the x,y,z location of the camera, choose POints. To specify clipping planes, choose CLip. To turn perspective off, choose Off. To suppress hidden lines, choose Hide. To move the display window, choose PAn. To change the magnification, choose Zoom. To reverse the last Dynamic View Control selection, choose Undo.

To rotate the camera

You can specify a new camera position by rotating the camera around the target.

A	The camera is rotated to view your drawing from one angle.

B	The camera is rotated another direction.

Choose CAmera. The Rotate Camera dialog box appears.

To rotate the target

You can specify a new position for the target (the entities you are viewing) by rotating the target around the camera.

A	The target is rotated to view your drawing from one angle.

B	The target is rotated another direction.

Choose TArget. The Rotate Target dialog box appears.

To twist the view

A view twisted -20-degrees.

You can tilt the view of your three-dimensional drawing by twisting the view around the line of sight between the camera and the target.

Choose TWist.

New view twist <0°>: To accept the current setting, press Enter or enter a new value.

TIP The twist angle is measured counterclockwise.

To specify the camera's distance from the target

You can change perspective by changing the camera's distance from the target.

A	The camera is moved to view your drawing from a farther perspective.

B	The camera is moved to view your drawing from a closer perspective.

Choose Distance.

New camera-to-target distance <value>: To accept the current setting, press Enter or enter a new value.

To specify the x,y,z coordinates of the camera and target

Choose POints.

Enter target point <value, value, value>: Specify a point, or enter the coordinates for the target point.

Enter camera point <0.0000, 0.0000, 0.0000>: Specify a point, or enter the coordinates for the camera point.

To specify the clipping planes

You can clip the view of your three-dimensional drawing by specifying clipping planes, which limit what you view to what is between the planes. You can position the clipping planes perpendicular to the line of sight between the camera and target. The parts of your drawing that are in front of or behind the clipping plane are not shown.

A	The direction of view.

B	The location of the front clipping plane.

C	The location of the back clipping plane.

Choose CLip.

Front · Back · <Off>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To turn front clipping on, choose Front. To turn clipping back on, choose Back.

To move the display window

You can move the image displayed in the window without changing the magnification by panning the display.

View of entity before panning.	View of entity after panning to the left.
Choose PAn.

Left · Right · Up · Down · PGLeft · PGRight · PGUp · PGDown · <Pan base point:> Specify the pan base point, the default selection. To move the display to the left, choose Left. To move the display to the right, choose Right. To move the display up, choose Up. To move the display down, choose Down. To move to display left one page, choose PGLeft. To move the display right one page, choose PGRight. To move the display up one page, choose PGUp. To move the display down one page, choose PGDown.

To specify the distance to pan

Specify the Pan base point.

Pan displacement point: Specify a displacement point. The displacement point indicates the distance you want to move the display.

To change the magnification

You can change the magnification by increasing or decreasing the size of entities in the current viewport.

A	The current magnification of the drawing.

B	The drawing is zoomed to increase magnification.

Choose Zoom.

If perspective is on, the following prompt appears:

Lens length <mm> to use for viewing <value>: To accept the current setting, press Enter or enter a new value.

If perspective is off, the following prompt appears:

View size <value>: To accept the current setting, press Enter or enter a new value.

  Command List


DXF In

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: DXFIN

Alias: DN

Displays the Load DXF File dialog box so you can import a DXF (drawing interchange format) file. A drawing interchange file (.dxf) is a text file containing the database information of all entities in a CAD drawing.

When you have finished importing the DXF file, a message is displayed indicating that the file has been added.

  Command List


DXF Out

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: DXFOUT

Alias: DX

Displays the Select DXF File dialog box so you can export the current drawing in a DXF (drawing interchange format) file. A drawing interchange file (.dxf) is a text file containing the drawing database information of all entities in your drawing.

When you enter the command to export a drawing in DXF format, the Select DXF File dialog box appears. When you enter the name of the DXF file and click Save, the following prompt appears in the command bar:

Entities · Binary · Version · Enter decimal places of accuracy (0-16) <6>: To accept the default setting for the precision level, press Enter. To change the precision, enter a new value. To select the entities you want to export, choose Entities. To save the file in binary format, choose Binary. Binary format contains the same information as a DXF format except the information is compacted (binary format is read and written faster but may not be accepted by as many programs as the DXF format). To specify the file format version (the Drawing Interchange Format version), choose Version.

TIP The default precision level is 6 decimal places. You can increase the precision level if you encounter accuracy problems after importing the saved DXF file, although doing this also increases the size of the file. We do not recommend that you enter a precision level of less than 6 decimal places.

To select the entities you want to export

Choose Entities.

Select entities to export: Select the entities you want to export in DXF format.

Enter decimal places of accuracy (0-16) <6>: To accept the default setting for the precision level, press Enter. To change the precision, enter a new value.

To specify the DXF file format version

Choose Version.

File version (0=(r2.5) 1=(r2.6) 2=(r9.0) 3=(r10) 4=(r11/12) 5=(r13) 6=(r14)) <6>: To accept the default version (R14), press Enter. To save the file in a different version, enter the number for that version.

  Command List


Coons Surface

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Coons Surface ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Coons Surface

Keyboard: EDGESURF

Creates a three-dimensional mesh with vertices averaged between four edges.

You can apply the Edge Surface command to any four adjoining edges. The edges can be lines, arcs, or open two-dimensional or three-dimensional polylines, but all edges must be touching to form a closed, rectangular entity.

A	Select the first edge for the mesh.

B	Select the second edge.

C	Select the third edge.

D	Select the fourth edge.

Before you can use the Edge Surface command, you must draw four connected linear segments.

Select the first of four connected linear entities for edge surface: You can select the four edges in any order. Select the first edge. The first edge you select determines the m-direction of the mesh, extending from the end point closest to the point you selected to the other end point. The two edges that touch the first edge you select form the n-edges of the mesh.

Select second edge: Select the second edge.

Select third edge: Select the third edge.

Select last edge: Select the fourth edge.

TIP Select the edges in sequential order.

TIP The m- and n-surface densities are set by the system variables SurfTab1 and SurfTab2, respectively. The minimum value is 2; the default is 6; the maximum value is 32767.

  Command List


Edit Entity Data

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Data > Create or Edit Entity Data ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Entity Data > Create or Edit Entity Data

Keyboard: EDITEDATA

Edits the extended Entity Data of an entity.

Select entity to create or edit Entity Data: Select the entity you want to edit. The Create or Edit Entity Data dialog box is displayed.

The data window of the dialog box displays the entity data in Windows Explorer format. Click the plus sign (+) next to a name to display its data. Each piece of data has a colored icon indicating the type of data. Also, if you pause the cursor over the data, a ToolTip is displayed describing the type of data. The data include:

•	Three-dimensional coordinates.

•	Arbitrary binary data.

•	Database handle.

•	Distance.

•	Long and short integers.

•	Real numbers.

•	Text string.

•	The name of the program that owns the entity data.

•	The name of a layer.

•	World direction.

•	World space displacement.

•	World space position.

•	Scale factor.

Delete To delete an entity data item, select it and then click Delete.

Insert To insert an entity data item, select the position where you want to insert it. Click Insert, and then select the type of data you want to insert. The program inserts the entity data item, giving it the generic type name. Replace the type name with the data.

Rename To rename an entity data item, select the item and then click Rename. Type the new data and then press Enter.

  Command List


Edit Length

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Edit Length ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Edit Length

Keyboard: EDITLEN

Alias: LEN, LENGTHEN

Changes the length of an open-ended entity. You can lengthen a line, polyline, freehand entity, and arc.

NOTE You cannot edit the length of a polyline that has been splined or fitted.

Edit length: DYnamic · Increment · Percent · Total · <Select entity to list length>: To display the current length of an entity, select the entity (the prompt reappears and includes the length of the selected entity). To lengthen an entity as you drag it, choose DYnamic. To lengthen an entity by specified increments, choose Increment. To lengthen an entity by a percentage of its total length, choose Percent. To specify the total length of an entity, choose Total.

TIP The length of the last entity you specified or drew before starting this command is displayed in the prompt.

To lengthen an entity as you drag its endpoint

A Select the entity you want to lengthen. B Move the pointer to lengthen the entity.	Result.
Choose Dynamic.

Mode · <Select entity to change>: Select the entity you want to lengthen. To change the method used to lengthen the entity, choose Mode.

New start point for line: Specify the new start point for the line.

You are prompted for the new end point of the line when you select the line near the end point. When you select the line near the start point, you are prompted for the new start point.

TIP The DYnamic option lengthens the end segments of a polyline; it does not change the length of interior segments. You can select an interior segment, but the program will dynamically change the length of the nearest end segment.

To lengthen or shorten an entity by specified increments

Choose Increment.

Angle · <Enter length increment (0.0000)>: Enter the incremental amount you want the entity lengthened. To lengthen the entity, enter a positive value. To shorten the entity, enter a negative value. To change the angle of the arc, choose Angle.

Enter angle increment <0.0000>: Enter the angle you to which you want the arc changed. This option does not work with lines and polylines.

Mode · <Select entity to change>: Select the entity you want to lengthen. Each time you select the entity, it increases (or decreases) in length by the increment amount. To change the method used to lengthen the entity, choose Mode.

TIP The Increment option lengthens the end point closest to your specified point. This option does not change the length of an interior segment of a polyline; instead, the program lengthens the end segment closest to your specified point.

To lengthen or shorten an entity by a percentage of its total length

Choose Percent.

Enter percent length <100.0000>: Enter the percentage of the entity’s total length. If you enter a value less than 100, the entity is shortened. If you enter a value larger than 100, the entity is lengthened. If you enter a value of 100, the length of the entity is unchanged.

TIP The Percent option lengthens the end point closest to your specified point. This option does not change the length of an interior segment of a polyline; instead, the program lengthens the end segment closest to your specified point. To close an arc, however, use the Arc option of the Circle command instead of entering a percentage value larger than 100.

The Percent option may have an unexpected effect on arcs: the arc remains an arc (does not become a circle), but may shorten or lengthen differently from your specified percentage.

To specify the total length of an entity

Choose Total.

Angle · <Enter total length (0.0000)>: Enter the total length (in drawing units) of the entity. To change the angle of the entity, choose Angle.

Mode · <Select entity to change>: Select the entity. To change the method you want to use to lengthen the entity, choose Mode.

Mode · Undo · <Select entity to change>: Select the entity. You can continue to select entities. To change the method you want to use to lengthen the entity, choose Mode. To undo the last change, choose Undo.

TIP The Total option lengthens the end point closest to your specified point. Unlike the other options, this option changes the overall length of a polyline; thus, polyline segments can be removed, starting at the end closest to your specified  point. This option may have an unexpected effect on arcs: the arc remains an arc (does not become a circle), but may shorten or lengthen differently from your specified total length.

To display the current length of an entity

Select the entity. The current length of the entity is displayed in the command bar. If the entity is an arc, the included angle of the arc is also displayed.

  Command List


Edit Polyline

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Edit Polyline ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Edit Polyline

Keyboard: EDITPLINE

Alias: PE, PEDIT

Edits a two-dimensional polyline, a three-dimensional polyline, or a polygon mesh.

Select polyline to edit: Select the polyline you want to edit. The next prompt varies, depending on the type of polyline you select.

When you select a two-dimensional polyline to edit, the following prompt appears:

Edit polyline: Edit vertices · Open [Close] · Decurve · Fit · Join · Linetype-mode · Reverse · Spline · Taper · Width · Undo · <eXit>: To exit the polyline edit mode, press Enter. To edit the vertices of the selected polyline, choose Edit vertices. To remove the last closing segment of a closed polyline, choose Open. To close an open polyline, choose Close. To remove the curve fitting applied by the Fit option or the splining applied by the Spline option, choose Decurve. To create circular curves between vertices, choose Fit. To add a line, arc, or polyline to the end of an open polyline, choose Join. To change the linetype mode, choose Linetype-mode. To change the direction in which the polyline was drawn, choose Reverse. To convert vertices to spline curves, choose Spline. To change the width of a polyline to a tapered width, choose Taper. To change the width of the polyline to a uniform width, choose Width. To reverse the last edit you made, choose Undo.

When you select a three-dimensional polyline to edit, the following prompt appears:

Edit polyline: Edit vertices · Open · Decurve · Join · Reverse · Undo · <eXit>: To exit polyline edit mode, press Enter. To edit the vertices of the selected polyline, choose Edit vertices. To remove the last closing segment of a closed polyline, choose Open. To close an open polyline, choose Close. To remove curves applied by the Fit or Spline options, choose Decurve. To add a line, arc, or polyline to the end of an open polyline, choose Join. To change the direction in which you drew the polyline, choose Reverse. To reverse the last edit you made, choose Undo.

When you select a polygon mesh to edit, the following prompt appears:

Edit polyline: Edit vertices · Desmooth · Mclose · Nclose[Nopen] · Undo · <eXit>: To exit polyline edit mode, press Enter. To edit vertices of the selected polygon mesh, choose Edit vertices. To revert to the original polygon mesh, choose Desmooth. To close the polygon mesh if it is open in the m-direction, choose Mclose. To close the polygon mesh if it is open in the n-direction, choose Nclose. To remove the last closing segment of the polygon mesh in the n-direction, choose Nopen. To reverse the last edit you made, choose Undo.

To edit vertices

A Select the polyline you want to edit. B Select the vertex you want to move. C Specify the new location of the vertex.	Result.
Choose Edit vertices.

Edit vertices: Next · Previous · Angle · Break · Insert · Move · Regen · SElect · Straighten · Width · eXit · <Next>: The first vertex (start point) of the polyline is marked with a triangle and an X. If this is not the vertex you want to edit, choose Next; the X marker moves to the next vertex. To select the previous vertex, choose Previous. To change the angle of the current vertex, choose Angle. To break the polyline at this vertex, choose Break. To insert a segment after this vertex, choose Insert. To move this vertex, choose Move; the red X market indicates the original vertex position, and the blue X marker shows the new vertex position. To regenerate the polyline, choose Regen. To edit this segment, choose SElect. To straighten this segment, choose Straighten. To change the width, choose Width.

To change the angle of the current vertex

Choose Angle.

Included angle for vertex segment (<0 is cw, 0 is straight, >0 is ccw) <0º>: Enter the angle for the segment. To angle the vertex in a clockwise direction, enter a value less than zero. To angle the vertex in a counterclockwise direction, enter a value greater than zero.

To decurve a polyline

A	Select the polyline you want to decurve.

B	The resulting polyline.

Choose Decurve. All arcs or splines in the polyline are converted to lines. Also, all extra vertices added using Fit or Spline are removed.

To fit (curve) a polyline

A	Select the polyline you want to fit.

B	The resulting polyline.

Choose Fit. All vertices in the polyline are converted to pairs of arcs. The curves of a fitted polyline pass through the vertices of the original polyline. In the Drawing Settings dialog box, you can specify whether you want quadratic or cubic curves.

To join a polyline

A	Select the first polyline.

B	Select the second polyline that you want to join to the first.

Choose Join.

Select entities: Select the entities that you want to join to the polyline. The end points of the entities you want to join must touch. You can join a line, arc, or another polyline to the end of an open polyline.

To change the linetype mode of a polyline

A	A polyline with continuous linetype mode off.

B	A polyline with continuous linetype mode on.

Choose Linetype.

Linetype continuous along polyline: ON · OFF <OFF>:  To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the polyline so that the linetype is created in a continuous linetype pattern, choose ON. To change the polyline so that the linetype starts and ends with a dash at each vertex, choose OFF.

To spline a polyline

A	Select the polyline that you want to spline curve.

B	The resulting spline-fit polyline.

Choose Spline.

You can specify the continuity level, the number of points per curved segment, and whether you want to display the control polyline frame in the Drawing Settings dialog box.

To taper a polyline

A	Select the polyline you want to taper.

B	The resulting tapered polyline.

Choose Taper.

Enter new starting polyline width <0.0000>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the width at the start of the polyline, enter a new value.

Enter new ending polyline width <0.0000>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the width at the end of the polyline, enter a new value.

To change the width of a polyline

A	Select the polyline you want to change.

B	The resulting polyline with the new width.

Choose Width.

Enter new width for all segments: Enter a new width.

  Command List


Elevation

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Elevation ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Elevation

Keyboard: ELEVATION

Changes the elevation and thickness of future entities that you draw.

  Command List


Ellipse

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Ellipse Axis-Axis ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Ellipse

Keyboard: ELLIPSE

Alias: EL

Draws ellipses and elliptical arcs. You can draw ellipses or elliptical arcs dynamically by specifying the major and minor axes or by specifying the center point.

TIP When you enter variables within the ELLIPSE command, enter only the uppercase letter of the variable you want to use. Entering the full word for Center, for example, turns on the Center Snap. You can enter other ESNAP options while within the ELLIPSE command.

Arc · Center · <First end of ellipse axis>: Specify the first end of the ellipse. To draw an elliptical arc, choose Arc. To specify the center point of the ellipse, choose Center.

To draw an ellipse by specifying the end points

A	Specify the start point on the major axis.

B	Specify the end point of the major axis.

C	Specify the half length of the minor axis.

Specify the end point of the ellipse axis.

Second end of axis: Specify the second end point.

Rotation · <Other axis>: Specify the other axis to draw the ellipse dynamically. To specify the rotation, choose Rotation and specify the angle of rotation.

To draw an ellipse by specifying the center point

A	Specify the center point of the ellipse.

B	Specify the end point of the major axis.

C	Specify the half length of the minor axis.

Choose Center.

Center of ellipse: Specify the center point of the ellipse.

Endpoint of axis: Specify the end point of the axis.

Rotation · <Other axis>: Specify the other axis to draw the ellipse dynamically. To specify the rotation, choose Rotation and specify the angle of rotation.

To draw an elliptical arc

Draw 2D toolbar:  {ic_eliptclaxisaxis.WMF}

Insert menu: Elliptical Arc

A	Specify the start point on the major axis.

B	Specify the end point on the major axis.

C	Specify the half length of the minor axis.

D	Specify the start of the arc.

E	Specify the end of the arc.

Choose Arc.

Center · <First end of ellipse axis>: Specify the end point of the ellipse axis. To specify the center point of the ellipse, choose Center.

Second end of axis: Specify the second end point.

Rotation · <Other axis>: Specify the other axis to draw the ellipse dynamically. To specify the rotation, choose Rotation and specify the angle of rotation.

To draw an elliptical arc by specifying its center point

A	Specify the center point of the elliptical arc.

B	Specify the end point of the major axis.

C	Specify the half length of the minor axis.

D	Specify the start of the arc.

E	Specify the end of the arc.

Choose Center.

Center of ellipse: Specify the center point of the elliptical arc.

Endpoint of axis: Specify the end point of the major axis.

Rotation · <Other axis>: Specify a point on the other axis. To specify the angle of the elliptical arc, choose Rotation.

Parameter · <Start angle of arc>: Specify the start of the arc. To create the arc using a parametric vector equation, choose Parameter.

Parameter · Included · <End angle>: Specify the end of the arc. To create the arc using a parametric vector equation, choose Parameter.

To draw an elliptical arc by specifying its center point and rotation angle

You can define the major to minor axis ratio of the elliptical arc by rotating a circle about the first axis.

Choose Rotation.

Rotation around major axis: Enter the rotation angle, or specify a point.

Parameter · <Start angle of arc>: Specify the start of the arc. To create the arc using a parametric vector equation, choose Parameter.

Parameter · Included · <End angle>: Specify the end of the arc. To create the arc using a parametric vector equation, choose Parameter.

To draw an elliptical arc using a parametric vector equation

You can draw an elliptical arc by specifying its parametric vector equation. The equation is:

p(u) = c + a* cos(u) = b* sin(u)

where c is the center of the ellipse and a and b are its major and minor axes, respectively.

Choose Parameter.

Angle · <Start parameter>: Specify the start parameter of the arc. To create the arc by specifying the angle, choose Angle.

Angle · Included · <End parameter>: Specify the end parameter of the arc. To create the arc by specifying the angle, choose Angle. To specify the included angle of the arc, choose Included.

  Command List


Endpoint Snap

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Snaps > Set Endpoint Snap ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap > Endpoint Snap

Keyboard: ENDPOINT

Toggles the Endpoint snap mode on or off. When set to on, the program snaps to the endpoint of an entity.

A	Snap the new line to the end point of an existing line.

  Command List


Properties

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Properties ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Properties

Keyboard: ENTPROP

Alias: CH, ED, MO, DDEDIT, MTPROP, DDCHPROP, DDMODIFY, AI_PROPCHK

Displays the Entity Properties dialog box, in which you can modify many of the properties of one or more entities. The properties you can change for entities are layer, thickness, linetype, color, linetype scale, and certain other properties specific to the selected entity.

If you have selected an entity to modify, the dialog box is displayed immediately. If you have not selected an entity, the following prompt appears in the command bar:

Select entities to modify: Select the entities you want to modify. The Entity Properties dialog box is displayed.

  Command List


Entity Snaps

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Snaps

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap

Keyboard: ESNAP

Alias: -OS, OSNAP, -OSNAP

Enables points to be precisely located on reference points of existing entities.

Snaps: NEArest · ENDpoint · MIDpoint · CENter · PERpendicular · TANgent · QUAdrant · INSertion · POInt · INTersection · PLAnview · <Off>: To turn entity snaps off, press Enter. To snap to the nearest point on an entity, choose NEArest. To snap to the end point of an entity, choose ENDpoint. To snap to the midpoint of an entity, choose MIDpoint. To snap to the center point of an entity, choose CENter. To snap to a point that is perpendicular to an entity, choose PERpendicular. To snap to the tangent of entity, choose TANgent. To snap to a quadrant point of an entity (arc, circle, ellipse, or elliptical arc), choose QUAdrant. To snap to the insertion point of a block, text, or an attribute, choose INSertion. To snap to a point entity, choose POInt. To snap to the three-dimensional intersection of an entity, choose INTersection. To snap to a two-dimensional intersection, choose PLAnview.

TIP The program provides three visual indicators to show that an entity snap is turned on. When any entity snap is turned on, ESNAP appears in black on the status line. When the Entity Snaps toolbar is displayed, the entity snap tool that is on is displayed as recessed. When drawing or editing, the cursor displays icons indicating the current entity snap.

  Command List


Exit

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: File > Exit

Keyboard: EXIT

Shortcut: Alt+F4

Alias: QUIT

Exits the program. If you have not saved any open drawings, you are prompted whether you want to save the drawing. To save the drawing, click Yes. To exit the program without saving the drawing, click No. To cancel exiting the program, click Cancel.

NOTE If you are in the dimensioning (DIM) mode and you type EXIT, the program returns to the beginning of the command bar entry. If you type EXIT again, you can then exit the program.

  Command List


Explore Blocks

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Explore Blocks ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Explore Blocks

Keyboard: EXPBLOCKS

Alias: XB, XR, BMAKE

Displays the Drawing Explorer with the Block Name list displayed. You can view, create, copy, or edit blocks in the Drawing Explorer.

Blocks represent a special type of entity that, once saved, can be inserted and manipulated in the drawing as a single entity. A block can consist of visible entities such as lines, arcs, and circles as well as visible or invisible data called attributes. You can use attributes to track things such as part numbers and prices and to export attribute information to an external database. You can also track the number of parts by counting the number of times a block has been inserted into the drawing. Blocks are stored as part of the drawing file.

External references have similar uses to blocks. Using external references, you can attach entire drawings to your current drawing. Unlike a block, however, an external reference does not become part of the current drawing (unless you first convert it to a regular block; see External Reference for more information).

You can save blocks in the Drawing Explorer. You can also use the Drawing Explorer to manage and insert copies of blocks. The Drawing Explorer lists the names of all blocks contained in the current drawing, along with other information about each block or external reference.

  Command List


Explore Text Styles

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Explore Text Styles ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Explore Text Styles

Keyboard: EXPFONTS

Alias: DDSTYLE, EXPSTYLE, EXPSTYLES

Displays the Drawing Explorer with the Text Style Name list displayed. You can view, create, copy, or edit fonts in the Drawing Explorer.

When you add text to a drawing, it is created using the current text style. The text style determines the font, size, angle, orientation, and other text characteristics.

Every drawing has at least one text style, named Standard, which initially uses the txt font. You cannot delete the Standard style, but you can rename it or modify it. For example, you can change the font or the obliquing angle applied to the font. You also can use an unlimited number of additional text styles in your drawing.

See Font Samples for a list of all the fonts available in IntelliCAD..

  Command List


Explore Layers

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Explore Layers ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Explore Layers

Keyboard: EXPLAYERS

Alias: LA, REN, DDLMODES, DDRENAME

Displays the Drawing Explorer with the Layer Name list displayed. You can view, create, copy, or edit layers in the Drawing Explorer.

Layers in IntelliCAD are like the transparent overlays you use in manual drafting. You use layers to organize different types of drawing information. In IntelliCAD, each entity in a drawing exists on a layer. When you draw an entity, it is created on the current layer.

You can control the visibility of layers. When you turn a layer off, entities drawn on that layer are no longer visible and they do not print. Although a layer may be invisible, you can still select it as the current layer, in which case new entities are also invisible until you turn the layer back on. Entities on invisible layers can also affect the display and printing of entities on other layers. For example, entities on invisible layers can hide other entities when you use the Hide command to remove hidden lines.

You can also freeze and thaw layers. Entities drawn on frozen layers do not display, do not print, and do not regenerate. When you freeze a layer, its entities do not affect the display or printing of other entities. For example, entities on frozen layers do not hide other entities when you use the Hide command to remove hidden lines. In addition, you cannot draw on a frozen layer until you thaw it, and you cannot make a frozen layer current.

You can lock or unlock layers. The entities on a locked layer are still visible and will print, but you cannot edit them. Locking a layer prevents you from accidentally modifying entities.

Each layer has its own color and linetype. Entities you draw on a particular layer are displayed in the color and linetype associated with that layer unless you override these settings. You control all of the associated settings for layers using the Layers elements in the Drawing Explorer.

  Command List


Explode

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Explode ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Explode

Keyboard: EXPLODE

Alias: X

Ungroups a block, polyline, polyface mesh, solid, or hatch, creating separate entities for each element. You can use the Explode command to break apart a block or polyline into separate elements. You may need to explode nested blocks more than once.

NOTE You cannot explode blocks inserted using MINSERT or as external references.

A	Wide polylines break apart into zero-thickness lines and arcs.

B	Polylines break apart into separate line and arc segments.

C	Multilines break apart into two separate line segments.

D	Rectangles and other polyline entities break apart into line segments.

E	Hatched entities break apart so that each line in the hatch is a separate entity.

F	Blocks break apart into separate entities.

Select entities to explode: Select the entities you want to explode. Press Enter or right-click the mouse after you select all entities.

TIP You can also select the entities to explode before choosing this command.

  Command List


Explorer

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Tools > Drawing Explorer ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Drawing Explorer

Keyboard: EXPLORER

Displays the Drawing Explorer so you can view, create, copy, or edit layers, linetypes, text styles, coordinate systems, blocks, or views within your drawings. You can also use the Drawing Explorer to copy these elements from one open drawing to another. The Drawing Explorer is a great way to manage and maintain your drawings.

The Drawing Explorer window displays the elements of your drawing in the left pane (Layers, Linetypes, Styles, Coordinate Systems, Views, and Blocks), and the settings for each of the elements in the pane on the right side. Actions that you perform in the Drawing Explorer window are similar to those you perform in the Windows Explorer—you can copy, paste, delete, rename, and sort the columns in the right pane.

For more information on how to manage different elements through the Drawing Explorer, click the element type.

Explore Layers

Explore Linetypes

Explore Text Styles

Explore Coordinate Systems

Explore Views

Explore Blocks

  Command List


Explore Linetypes

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Explore Linetypes ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Explore Linetypes

Keyboard: EXPLTYPES

Alias: LT, DDLTYPE

Displays the Drawing Explorer with the Linetype Name list displayed. You can view, create, copy, or edit linetypes in the Drawing Explorer.

A linetype consists of a repeating pattern of dots, dashes, or blank spaces. You can use different linetypes to represent specific kinds of information. For example, if you are drawing a site plan, you can draw roads using a continuous linetype or property lines using a border linetype consisting of dashes and dots.

By default, every drawing has at least three linetypes: CONTINUOUS, BYLAYER, and BYBLOCK. You cannot rename or delete these linetypes. Your drawing may also contain an unlimited number of additional linetypes. You can load more linetypes into the program from a linetype library file or create and save linetypes you define.

  Command List


Export

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: File > Export to File

Keyboard: EXPORT

Alias: EXP

Displays the Export Drawing File As dialog box so you can export the drawing to a selected file type. You can export the drawing as .dwg, .dxf, .sld, .emf, and .wmf files.

Extension	Meaning

DWG	AutoCAD drawing file format

DXF	Drawing Interchange file format.

SLD	AutoCAD slide file format.

EMF	Enhanced metafile format.

WMF	Windows metafile format.

When a drawing is saved in a version of DWG or DXF earlier than Release 14, some entities may be changed or deleted.

The EMF and WMF formats are vector formats commonly used for pictures by non-CAD Windows applications, such as word processors and spreadsheets.

  Command List


Explore Coordinate Systems

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Explore Coordinate Systems ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Explore Coordinate Systems

Keyboard: EXPUCS

Alias: UC, DDUCS

Displays the Drawing Explorer with the UCS Name list displayed. You can view, create, copy, or edit UCS definitions in the Drawing Explorer.

When you create entities in a drawing, they are located in relation to the drawing's underlying Cartesian coordinate system. Every drawing has a fixed coordinate system called the World Coordinate System (WCS). You cannot delete or modify the WCS.

Your drawing may contain additional coordinate systems, however, each with its own 0,0,0 origin and orientation. You can create as many user coordinate systems as you want, and then save and recall them as you need them.

For example, you can create a separate user coordinate system (UCS) for each side of a building. Then, by switching to the UCS for the east side of the building, you can draw the windows on that side by specifying only their x and y coordinates.

You can create and then switch between various user coordinate systems by selecting Coordinate Systems in the Drawing Explorer.

  Command List


Explore Views

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Explore Views ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Explore Views

Keyboard: EXPVIEWS

Alias: V, DDVIEW

Displays the Drawing Explorer with the View Name list displayed. You can view, create, copy, or edit views in the Drawing Explorer.

As you work on a drawing, you may find that you frequently switch among different portions of it. For example, if you are drawing the floor plan of a house, you may zoom in to particular rooms of the house and then zoom out to display the entire house. Although you can repeat the Pan and Zoom commands to do this, it is much easier to save various views of the drawing as named views. You can then quickly switch between these views. You can save and later restore named views using either the View command or the View(s) element in the Drawing Explorer.

  Command List


Extend

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Extend ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Extend

Keyboard: EXTEND

Alias: EX

Lengthens a line, an arc, a two-dimensional polyline, or a ray to meet another entity. You can use polylines, arcs, circles, ellipses, infinite lines, lines, rays, splines, or viewports in paper space as bounding entities. When you use a two-dimensional polyline as a bounding entity, entities are extended to the center line of the polyline.

A Select the entity you want to use as the bounding entity. B Select the entities you want to extend.	Result.
Select boundary entities for extend <ENTER to select all>: To select all entities in the drawing, press Enter. Otherwise, select the entity to which you want the second entity extended. After you select the bounding entities, press Enter or right-click the mouse.

TIP If you press Enter to select all entities in the drawing as boundaries, the program immediately continues to the next prompt.

Edge mode · Fence · <Select entity to extend>: Select the entity you want to lengthen. To specify that you want an entity to extend to the imagined intersection of two entities (if the two entities do not intersect), choose Edge mode. To extend the entity by selecting fence points, choose Fence.

To extend an entity to an imagined intersection

A Select the entity you want to use as the bounding entity. B Select the entities you want to extend.	Result
Choose Edge mode.

Extend · No extend <No extend>: To lengthen the entity even if it does not intersect the boundary entity, choose Extend. If you do not want to lengthen the entity if it does not intersect the boundary entity, choose No extend.

NOTE If you select all entities in the drawing as boundaries, selecting Extend may cause an unexpected result. The entity will be extended to a different entity's imaginary boundary than you may expect.

To extend an entity by selecting fence points

You can extend multiple entities to one entity by selecting fence points.

A Select the boundary entity. B Specify the first fence point. C Specify the second fence point. D Specify the last fence point.	Result
Choose Fence.

First point of fence: Specify the first fence point. A fence point is the beginning point along the entities you want to extend.

Next fence point: Specify the next fence point. You can continue to specify fence points until you have extended all entities. To exit fence mode, press Enter.

TIP To close an arc, use the Arc option of the Circle command.

  Command List


Face

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > 3D Face ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Face

Keyboard: FACE

Alias: 3F, 3DFACE

Draws a three-dimensional face entity. You can also draw three-dimensional plane sections using the Face command.

A	Specify the points A through H in the order shown in the illustration.

B	The result is a drawing with three faces.

Invisible edge · <First point of 3D face>: Specify the first point of the face entity. To make this an invisible edge, choose Invisible edge.

Invisible edge · <Second point>: Specify the second point of the face entity. To make this an invisible edge, choose Invisible edge.

Invisible edge · <Third point of 3D face>: Specify the third point of the face entity. To make this an invisible edge, choose Invisible edge. To create a face with three edges, press Enter.

Invisible edge · <Last point>: Specify the last point of the face entity with four edges. To make this an invisible edge, choose Invisible edge.

Continue to add multiple, adjacent faces by selecting additional third and last points (the last two prompts repeat until you end the Face command). To end the command, press Enter or right-click the mouse.

TIP To create a planar face, position all points on the same plane.

To create a face with invisible edges

A	The face has three invisible edges.

To accurately model three-dimensional entities with blank edges, you can control which edges to make visible. Choose Invisible edge to make an edge invisible before you select the first point. You can also make a face entity in which all edges are invisible. Doing this results in a phantom entity, which does not appear as a wireframe entity but can hide entities in your drawing. A phantom entity appears in shaded renderings.

  Command List


Fill

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Fill ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Fill

Keyboard: FILL

Controls whether solids and wide polylines are automatically filled when displayed and output.

Donut with fill on (left) and off (right).

ON · OFF · Toggle <On>: The current setting is displayed in brackets. To turn fill on, choose ON. To turn fill off, choose OFF. To reverse the setting, enter Toggle.

TIP When fill is turned off, the program displays and plots filled drawing entities faster.

  Command List


Fillet

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Fillet ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Fillet

Keyboard: FILLET

Alias: FI

Constructs an arc between two lines, arcs, circles, infinite lines, rays, or two-dimensional polylines. You can specify the radius of the arc that is created between the two entities.

When the entities to be filleted exist on two different layers, the fillet is drawn on the current layer. Otherwise, both entities to be filleted on the same layer are drawn on the same layer.

If the entities you want to fillet do not intersect, they are trimmed or extended so that they can be filleted.

A Select the first entity for the fillet. B Select the second entity for the fillet.	Result.
Fillet: Settings · Polyline · <Select first entity>: Select the first entity between which you want to create a fillet. To change the fillet settings, choose Settings. To fillet all of the vertices of a two-dimensional polyline, choose Polyline.

Select second entity: Select the second entity between which you want to create a fillet.

TIP You can preselect entities to fillet. When you preselect entities, the program uses the midpoint of the entities as the selection points. If your drawing has two overlapping lines, the smaller ends are cut off and the longer pieces are filleted. To fillet the two smaller ends, start the command before you select the entities.

TIP You can use the TRIMMODE system variable to specify whether corners are retained. To retain corners, set the TRIMMODE variable to 0. To remove the corners, set the TRIMMODE variable to 0.

To fillet all vertices in a polyline entity

A Select the two-dimensional polyline containing vertices you want to fillet.	Result
Choose Polyline.

Select 2D polyline to fillet: Select the two-dimensional polyline you want to fillet. All vertices in the polyline are filleted. If an arc segment separates two line segments to form a corner, the arc segment is removed and replaced by a fillet. If vertices in the polyline cannot be filleted, a message appears in the command bar notifying you of the number of vertices that the program was able to fillet.

TIP The program fillets a closed polyline by two different methods, depending on how it was closed. If you used the Close option of the Polyline command, then all vertices are filleted. If you specified the endpoint of the last segment, the last vertex is not filleted, even if you used entity snap to place the endpoint.

A Select the polyline containing vertices you want to fillet.	Result
To fillet selected vertices in a polyline entity

A Select the first segment of the polyline for the fillet. B Select the second segment of the polyline for the fillet.	Result
Select the first segment of the polyline.

Select second entity: Select the second segment between which you want to create a fillet. The program fillets all vertices between the points you specify. For example, if you select the left vertical line and then the right vertical line of a rectangle, the bottom two vertices are filleted. If you select the right vertical line first and then the left line, the top two vertices are filleted.

TIP The program fillets vertices based on the direction of the polyline used to construct the entity. To determine the direction of the polyline, you can use the EDITPLINE command. Choose Edit vertices, and then to jump to the next vertex choose Next.

To change the fillet settings

Choose Settings.

The Drawing Settings dialog box is displayed.

  Command List


Filter

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: FILTER

Alias: F, DDFILTER

Prompts you to select entities to include in the selection set.

Select entities to include in set: Select entities. To end the command, press Enter.

  Command List


Flatten

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Flatten ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Flatten

Keyboard: FLATTEN

Flattens three-dimensional entities to two dimensions. All selected entities are flattened onto the current UCS elevation plane, which need not be parallel to the WCS x,y plane.

TIP The Flatten command allows you to move sets of entities, such as a three-dimensional wall, to a new elevation. When you are in plan view, this command has no visible effect.

A Select the entity you want to flatten.	Result
Select entities to flatten: Select the entities you want flattened.

New UCS elevation <0.0000>: Enter the new elevation.

Planar entities (such as text, arcs, and two-dimensional polylines) whose extrusion direction is not parallel to the current UCS z-axis are ignored. Rays and infinite lines whose direction vectors are parallel to the current UCS z-axis are also ignored.

TIP It may be possible to restore an entity to three dimensions by changing its thickness with ENTPROP.

  Command List


Font

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: FONT

Alias: ST, STYLE

Creates or changes current text fonts (styles). You can also create named text styles by selecting combinations of font, mirroring, obliquing, and horizontal scaling.

See Font Samples for a list of all the fonts available in IntelliCAD.

? to list existing styles · <Text style to create or modify> · <Standard>: To select the default, press Enter. To list existing styles, choose ?.To create a new style, enter the name of the style. To modify a style, enter the name of the style you want to modify.

To list existing styles

Enter ?, and then enter *. The Prompt History window appears, containing a list of all defined styles. For example, the following information appears for the STANDARD style, which is present in every drawing:

Text styles:

Style name: STANDARD

Font file: txt.shx

Big-font file:

Height: 0.0000  Width factor: 1.0000  Obliquing angle: 0

Generation: Normal.

To create a new style

Enter the name of the new style. The Select Font dialog box appears. Select a font name and then click Open.

To modify an existing style

Enter the name of the style you want to modify. The Select Font dialog box appears. Select a font name and then click Open.

Text height <0.0000>:  Enter a value for the height of the text. When the height is 0, you are prompted for the text height when you use the Text, DText, and MText commands.

Width factor <1.0000>:  Enter a value for the width factor. A value less than 1.0 makes the text narrower; a value larger than 1.0 makes the text wider. For example, a value of 0.85 makes the text 15% narrower, and a value of  1.15 makes the text 15% wider.

Obliquing angle <0.0000>: Enter a value for the obliquing angle. This is the angle at which the letters slope. A positive value slopes the text forward, and a negative value slopes the text backward. For example, a value of 15 slopes the text forward by 15 degrees.

Draw text backwards? <N>: To draw text backward, enter Y. Doing this is useful when you want to plot a mirror image of the drawing. To draw text normally, enter N.

Draw text upside-down? <N>: To draw text upside-down, enter Y. To draw text normally, enter N.

Draw text vertically? <N>: To draw text vertically, enter Y. Not all fonts have the capability to be drawn vertically, so this prompt appears only when the font has that capability. To draw the text normally, enter N.

  Command List


Font Samples

  Command List


Freehand

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Draw Freehand ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Freehand

Keyboard: FREEHAND

Alias: SKETCH

Allows you to sketch by drawing short line or polyline segments as quickly as you move the input device.

An example of a freehand line.

Freehand: Length of segments <0.1000>: Enter the length of segments for the line entity.

Press ENTER to end · Pen down · (Begin . . .) Click the mouse to begin drawing the freehand entity, but do not hold the mouse button down while you draw.

Press ENTER to end · Pen up · Quit · Delete on · Connect · Straight to cursor · Write to drawing · (Sketching . . . ): To stop drawing, click the mouse a second time. You can continue to draw freehand entities by clicking the mouse to start drawing and clicking again to stop. To connect to the last end point, choose Connect.

When you click the mouse, you can begin to draw in a manner similar to putting a pencil to paper. When you click the mouse a second time, the action is similar to lifting the pencil from the paper to stop drawing.

TIP To create a smoother freehand entity, use smaller line segments.

To pause drawing freehand segments

To pause while drawing, for example, to move the pencil to another location without stopping the Freehand command, type p, which switches between Pen up and Pen down.

To quit drawing freehand segments

To quit drawing freehand segments without saving, type q for Quit. Quit does not end the command; if you type q and then press Enter, you can immediately start drawing again.

To erase segments of the freehand entity

To erase segments, type d and move the cursor over the last segments you drew, or choose Delete on. To continue drawing the freehand entity, type c, move the cursor to the end of the last segment, and continue drawing.

To draw a straight segment from the cursor to the last end point

Choose Straight to cursor. A straight segment is drawn from the cursor to the last end point of the freehand entity.

To write to drawing

Choose Write to drawing. This action “writes” the freehand entity to your drawing. You can continue drawing the freehand entity after you write it to your drawing.

  Command List


Full Render

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Rendering > Full Render ( [image])

Menu: View > Rendering > Full Render

Keyboard: FULLRENDER

Creates a photo-realistic image of your model, complete with light sources, shadows, surface material properties, and reflections. You can illuminate your image with spotlights, distant lighting to simulate sunshine, and ambient light. If you choose not to customize the light sources, the program generates default light sources for you (one main light from the left side with a small filler light from the right).

An example of fullrender on multiple entities.

Rays from imaginary light sources are traced as they reflect off the surfaces of the model, a process called ray tracing. Ray tracing determines where shadows fall and how reflections on shiny materials such as metal and glass appear. You can modify the reflective properties of the materials that make up your model to control how the light rays reflect off its surfaces.

Full rendering automatically creates a base on which your model is displayed, if you don't already have one, so it does not appear suspended in space. You can customize the base to add patterns or textures using the Render Settings command.

A background is also automatically added to the image. You can customize the background to make it appear as a cloudy sky, or you can use an imported raster graphic such as a stone wall, making it even more realistic. See Backgrounds for more information.

The Full Render command produces a more realistic image than the Render command, which only shades and illuminates the image without calculating shadows and reflections, using surface materials, or using a background image. However, Render is significantly faster than Full Render, so you can save time by using Render to prepare your image before using the Full Render command.

You can export fully rendered images using the Render Settings command.

TIP The smaller your viewport, the faster the image will render.

NOTE Shadows require considerable time and memory, so minimize their use when they are not essential. If you want to fully render a model with materials such as glass or mirror, you can save time by switching shadows off (on the Shadows tab of the Render Settings dialog box, click the Enable Shadows check box to turn it off) and by using the Eye Light option on the Studio Light Set tab of the Lighting command. If you want to see shadows when setting up your image, consider reducing the shadow resolution (also on the Render Settings dialog box). This may produce a coarse looking shadow boundary but should be sufficient to set up lights and shadows prior to creating a final, production-quality image.

  Command List


Graphics Screen

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: GRAPHSCR

Switches between the Prompt History window and the drawing window. This command is primarily used in command scripts and menus.

To turn the Prompt History window on, type textscr. To turn the Prompt History window off, type graphscr.

TIP You can also press F2 or type pmthist to toggle the Prompt History window on or off.

  Command List


Grid

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Reference Grid ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Reference Grid

Keyboard: GRID

Shortcut: F7

Alias: G

Displays a grid of dots on the screen for visual reference. You can specify the spacing of the grid.

An example of drawing being viewed with grid on.

Grid is off: ON · Aspect · [Equal] · <Grid spacing (synched with snap)>: To specify grid spacing, enter a numeric value or specify two points using the mouse. To turn the grid on, choose ON. To turn the grid off, choose OFF (this option is available when the grid is on). To specify different horizontal and vertical grid spacing, choose Aspect. When the horizontal and vertical grid are different, the Equal option appears; choose it to set the spacing the same.

The message reports the status of the grid spacing:

x and y = 10.0000: The x- and y-distance between grid points is the same (10 drawing units in this example).

x = 12.0000, y = 6.0000: The x- and y-distance between grid points differ, as set by the Aspect option.

Synced with snap: The grid spacing is the same as the snap spacing, as set by the Snap command.

TIP When the grid spacing is 0, it is not turned off. Rather, the grid is set to the same spacing as the snap spacing.

To specify different horizontal and vertical grids

Choose Aspect.

Horizontal spacing <0.0000>: Enter the horizontal spacing.

Vertical spacing <0.0000>: Enter the vertical spacing.

TIP When you choose Equal, the program sets the x (horizontal) spacing equal to the y (vertical) spacing.

  Command List


Hatch

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Insert > Hatch ( [image])

Menu: Draw 2D > Hatch

Keyboard: HATCH

Alias: H

Performs cross-hatching and pattern-filling of closed entities. The hatch created is a non-associative hatch, which means that you cannot change the hatch pattern and automatically update the drawing.

For a sample of hatch patterns, see Hatch Patterns. or ISO Hatch Patterns.

NOTE Hatch patterns are memory intensive and can take a considerable amount of time to draw. Hatch patterns inserted as exploded entities use even more memory. To improve performance, add hatching as one of the last steps when you create a drawing, or insert hatches on a separate layer that you can freeze as you continue to work on your drawing.

A Select the entity you want to fill with a hatch pattern.	Result.
Hatch: ? to list patterns · & for lines · Preview · Style · <pattern>: To apply the current hatch pattern, press Enter. To list the hatch patterns available, choose ?. To use lines as the hatch pattern, choose &. To preview a hatch pattern, choose Preview. To specify whether the hatch pattern is to fill the inside or outside of an entity, choose Style.

To list the names of hatch patterns

Enter the hatch pattern name. To list all patterns available, enter ?.

Pattern(s) to list <*>: To view the names of all available hatch patterns, press Enter, or type the name of a hatch pattern. You can use wild cards to view groups of patterns, such as CTYS* to list all hatch pattern names starting with CTYS, or RBRICK? to list all hatch pattern names with RBRICK.

Scroll · <ENTER to view next screen>: To view the next 20 lines of hatch pattern names, press Enter. To list names without pausing, type s.

To draw a hatch pattern consisting only of lines

A Select the entity you want to hatch with lines.	Result.
Enter & to draw a hatch pattern consisting of lines.

Proceed · Angle for pattern <0.0000º>: To use the default angle, press Enter. To change the angle of the hatch, enter a new value. A common hatch pattern angle is 45 degrees. To skip the next two prompts, choose Proceed.

Space between standard pattern lines <1.0000>: To use the default spacing, press Enter. To change the spacing between the hatch pattern lines, enter a new value.

Cross-hatch area? <N>:  To apply single hatching, press Enter. To have the program apply a cross-hatch (the same pattern repeated at 90 degrees), enter Y.

ENTER for direct hatch option · <Select hatch boundary entities>: Select the entities you want to hatch. To specify the area you want to hatch by drawing a polyline, press Enter.

TIP  To repeat the Hatch command, press Enter or the Spacebar. The Hatch command starts at the beginning.

To apply a named hatch pattern

Enter a name for the pattern.

Proceed · Scale for pattern <0.0000>: To use the default scale, press Enter. To change the scale, enter a new value. To skip the next two prompts, choose Proceed.

NOTE A small scale creates a dense pattern that looks more like a solid fill than like a pattern. A large scale creates a sparse pattern that may not be visible. If you are not sure of the scale factor to use for the hatch pattern, use Preview to see the scale before committing to the pattern.

Angle for pattern <0.0000º>: To use the default angle, press Enter. To change the angle of the hatch, enter a new value. Because named hatch patterns  are drawn at their proper angle automatically, you will not normally need to change the angle.

ENTER for direct hatch option · <Select hatch boundary entities>: Select the entities you want to hatch. To specify the area you want to hatch by drawing a polyline, press Enter.

NOTE Hatch patterns can increase the redraw speed and the plotting time. Place hatch patterns on their own layer(s). When the hatch patterns are not needed, such as during editing and check plots, freeze those layers to reduce the redraw and plotting times.

To specify the area you want to hatch using the direct hatch option

A Specify the start point for the hatch boundary. B Specify the next hatch boundary point. C Specify the next hatch boundary point. D Specify the next hatch boundary point. E Specify the next hatch boundary point. F Specify the end point for the hatch boundary.	Result.
Press Enter.

Retain boundary as a polyline? <N> To specify the area without retaining the bounding polyline entity, enter N. To specify the area and retain the bounding polyline entity, enter Y.

Starting point: Specify the start point for the hatch boundary.

Arc · Follow · Halfwidth · Length · Width · <Next point>: Specify the next point for the hatch boundary. To draw an arc, choose Arc. To specify the half width or width of the polyline boundary, choose Halfwidth or Width. To specify the length of the polyline boundary segment, choose Length.

The Follow option uses the angle stored in the Lastangle system variable.

ENTER to apply hatch · <Starting point>: To continue drawing the areas you want to hatch, specify another starting point for the next hatch area. To apply the hatch to the area you drew, press Enter.

To preview a hatch pattern

Choose Preview.

Pattern to preview:  ? to list · & for lines: Enter the name of the hatch pattern you want to preview. To display a list of all hatch patterns available, choose ?. To use lines as the hatch pattern, choose & for lines.

Proceed · Scale for pattern <1.0000>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the scale, enter a new value. To continue without being prompted for more input, choose Proceed.

Angle for pattern <0.0000°>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the angle, enter a new value.

ENTER for direct hatch option · <Select hatch boundary entities>: Select the entities you want to hatch. To specify the area you want to hatch by drawing a polyline, press Enter.

Do you want to keep this hatch?  Yes · <No>: To save the hatch pattern you previewed, choose Yes. To remove the hatch pattern, choose No.

NOTE After a hatch pattern has been placed, it is an independent entity (an unnamed block). You can move, copy, and erase it. If you explode the block, it reverts to lines and points.

To specify the hatch pattern style

Choose STyle

Hatch style to use: All · Outer · <Standard>: To hatch all interior entities, including text, choose All. To hatch only the outermost ring, choose Outer; no interior entities are hatched. To alternate the hatched and unhatched areas, choose Standard; no text is hatched.

  Command List


Hatch Pattern Samples

The following are samples of hatch patterns that are delivered with IntelliCAD in the file icad.pat, as well as in Hatch_patterns.dwg. These patterns can be used to hatch areas in your drawings. For a sample of ISO hatches, see ISO Hatch Patterns.

  Command List


ISO Hatch Pattern Samples

The following are samples of ISO hatch patterns that are delivered with IntelliCAD in the file icadiso.pat, as well as in ISO_hatch_patterns.dwg. These patterns can be used to hatch areas in your drawings. For a sample of standard hatches, see Hatch Patterns.

  Command List


Help

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Help ( [image])

Menu: Help > IntelliCAD Help

Keyboard: HELP

Shortcut: F1

Alias: ?

Displays context-sensitive online help for the current command.

  Command List


Hide

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Rendering > Hide ( [image])

Menu: View > Rendering > Hide

Keyboard: HIDE

Alias: HI

Creates a hidden-line view of your model by removing all the lines that would be hidden behind other surfaces when seen from your vantage point. Use the Redraw or Regenerate commands to return to the original wireframe view.

Before and after using the Hide command.	Result.
Three-dimensional entities are created as wireframe models in IntelliCAD, so you see lines that would normally be obscured by the surface of the entity. Using the Hide command removes those the lines from the screen, making the model appear solid.

NOTE You cannot plot a drawing with hidden-lines removed.

  Command List


ID Coordinates

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Inquiry > ID Coordinates ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Inquiry > ID Coordinates

Keyboard: IDPOINT

Alias: ID

Displays the UCS coordinates of a specified point.

Select point to identify coordinates: Specify the point. The x,y,z-coordinates are displayed in the command bar.

  Command List


Import

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Open ( [image])

Menu: File > Open

Keyboard: IMPORT

Alias: IMP

Displays the Open Drawing dialog box so you can open another drawing file (.dwg) in its own window in the current drawing. You can also open Drawing Interchange Format (.dxf) files.

TIP  The Import command is different from both the External Reference command, in which you can view another drawing at the same time as the current drawing, and the Insert command, which inserts the imported drawing as a block.

  Command List


Infinite Line

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Infinite Line ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Infinite Line

Keyboard: INFLINE

Alias: XL, XLINE

Draws an infinite line in both directions from a specified starting point.

A	Specify a point through which the infinite line passes.

B	Specify the angle of the infinite line.

Infinite line: Bisect · Horizontal · Vertical · Angle · Parallel · <Point along Line>: To start drawing an infinite line using the default method, specify the point through which you want the infinite line to pass. To draw an infinite line in a horizontal direction, choose Horizontal. To draw an infinite line in a vertical direction, choose Vertical. To specify the angle of the infinite line, choose Angle. To draw an infinite line parallel to another entity, choose Parallel.

Direction: Specify the direction in which you want to draw the infinite line.

Direction: Specify the direction in which you want to draw another infinite line. The second infinite line is drawn through the same point as the first infinite line. You can continue to draw infinite lines by selecting the direction of the ray. To stop drawing infinite lines, right-click the mouse.

To draw an infinite line by bisecting a point or entity

Choose Bisect.

Entity · <Vertex point>: Specify the vertex point through which you want the infinite line to pass. To select an entity to bisect, choose Entity.

Bisection angle start point: Specify the start of the angle.

Bisection angle end point: Specify the end of the angle.

To select an entity to bisect

A	Select the point to bisect.

B	Specify the start of the bisect angle.

C	Specify the end of the bisect angle.

Choose Entity.

Select line, arc, or polyline segment to bisect: Select the entity you want to bisect.

To draw a horizontal infinite line along the x-axis

A	Specify the point through which you want the horizontal infinite line to pass.

Choose Horizontal.

Location: Specify a point through which the horizontal infinite line passes.

Location: Specify the point for a second horizontal infinite line. You can continue to draw horizontal infinite lines by selecting the point through which the infinite line passes. To stop drawing infinite lines, right-click the mouse.

To draw a vertical infinite line along the y-axis

A	Specify the point through which you want the vertical infinite line to pass.

Choose Vertical.

Location: Specify a point through which the vertical infinite line passes.

Location: Specify the point for a second vertical infinite line. You can continue to draw vertical infinite lines by selecting the point through which the infinite line passes. To stop drawing infinite lines, right-click the mouse.

To draw an infinite line by specifying its angle

A	Specify the point through which you want the infinite line to pass, then specify the angle.

Choose Angle.

Reference · <Enter angle (45°)>: To accept the current setting for the angle, press Enter, or enter a new value. To specify an entity to use as the reference point, choose Reference.

Location: Specify a point through which the infinite line passes.

Location: Specify the point for a second infinite line. You can continue to draw infinite lines by selecting the point through which the infinite line passes. To stop drawing infinite lines, right-click the mouse.

To draw in infinite line using an entity as the reference point for the angle

A	Specify the entity that you want to use as the reference point for the angle.

B	Specify the angle from the reference point.

Choose Reference.

Select reference entity: Specify the entity you want to use as a reference point for the angle.

Enter angle: Enter the angle from the reference point.

To draw a infinite line that parallels another entity

A	Specify the entity you want to parallel.

B	Specify the side for the infinite line.

Choose Parallel.

Through point · <Distance for parallel infinite line> (2.5000): To accept the current setting for the distance you want the infinite line drawn from an entity, press Enter. To specify a point through which you want the infinite line to pass, choose Through point.

Select entity for parallel infinite line: Select the entity that you want the infinite line to parallel.

Side for parallel infinite line: Select the side of the entity where you want to draw the infinite line.

To select the through point

A	Select the entity you want to parallel.

B	Select the point through which you want the infinite line to pass.

Choose Through point.

Select entity for parallel infinite line:

Through the point: Specify the point through which you want the infinite line to pass.

  Command List


Insert

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: INSERT

Inserts a copy of a previously drawn block entity, or inserts another drawing as a block into the current drawing.

? to list blocks in drawing · BROWSE · EXPLORE · <Block to insert>: To insert the block you previously created or inserted, press Enter (the name of the block appears between the angle brackets). To specify the block you want to insert, enter the name of the block. To display a list of existing blocks in the Prompt History window, enter ?. To insert a block that was saved to disk, choose BROWSE. To display the Drawing Explorer, choose EXPLORE.

TIP To insert a block using the Insert Block dialog box, type ~ (tilde) before you type INSERT.

To insert a block

Enter the name of the block you want to insert.

Multiple blocks · <Insertion point for block>: Specify the insertion point for the block. To insert multiple copies of the same block, choose Multiple blocks.

Done · XYZ · X scale factor <1.0000>: To accept the default value displayed, press Enter, or enter the x-scale factor. To insert the block without specifying further options, choose Done. To specify the x,y,z-scale, choose XYZ, or drag the pointer.

Y scale factor: <Equal to X scale (1.0000)>: To accept the default value displayed, press Enter, or enter the y-scale factor, or drag the pointer.

Rotation angle for block <0.0000°>: To accept the default value displayed, press Enter, or enter the rotation angle, or drag the pointer.

To specify the x,y,z scale

Choose XYZ.

Done · Corner · X scale factor <1.0000>: To accept the default setting, press Enter, or enter the x scale factor. To insert the block without specifying further options, choose Done. To indicate the x,y-scale by picking two points on the screen, choose Corner; when prompted, specify the other corner This method skips the prompt for a y-scale factor.

Y scale factor: <Equal to X scale (1.0000)>: To accept the default setting, press Enter, or enter the y scale factor.

X scale is 1.0000, Y scale is 1.0000. Z scale factor: <Equal to X scale (1.0000)>: To accept the default setting, press Enter, or enter the z scale factor.

Rotation angle for block <0°>: To accept the default value displayed, press Enter, or enter the rotation angle.

To insert a block that was saved to disk

Choose BROWSE.

The Insert Block dialog box appears. Select the block you want to insert, and then click Open.

To display the Drawing Explorer

Choose Explore. The Drawing Explorer window is displayed with the Blocks group open.

  Command List


Insertion Point Snap

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Snaps > Set Insertion Point Snap ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap > Insertion Point Snap

Keyboard: INSERTION

Toggles the Insertion snap setting on or off. When set to ON, you can snap a new entity that you are drawing to the insertion point of an attribute, block, or text.

A	Draw a new entity by snapping to the insertion point of another entity.

  Command List


Insert Object

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Insert > Object

Keyboard: INSERTOBJ

Alias: IO

Displays the Insert Object dialog box so you can insert an ActiveX object into the drawing.

To insert an object created new in another program

Choose Create New.

Object Type: Select an object type name from the list.

Display as Icon: The object is displayed as an icon in the drawing.

When you click OK, the application associated with the object type is launched. For example, if you select Netscape Hypertext Document as the object type, the Netscape Navigator is launched. The program replaces the IntelliCAD menu and toolbars with its own. The program creates a window within the IntelliCAD drawing area where you perform your editing.

After you have created the object, exit the application by clicking anywhere on the IntelliCAD drawing area outside the other program’s window.

To insert an object existing in a file

Choose Create from File.

File: Enter the name of the file.

Browse: Click to display the file dialog box. Select a file and then click Insert.

Link: The object is inserted with a link to the original file. When you edit the file, you can use the Olelinks command to update the object.

Display as Icon: The object is displayed as an icon in the drawing.

When you click OK, the file is inserted in your drawing.

To display the object as an icon in the drawing

Choose Display as Icon.

Change Icon: Click to select another icon to represent the object. The program displays the Change Icon dialog box.

Current: Select to use the current icon.

Default: Select to use the default icon associated with the object.

From File: Select to use an icon stored in a file.

Label: Edit the name that appears below the icon.

Browse: Click to choose a file from which to select an icon. You can use any icon from any program.

TIP Displaying the object as an icon is faster than displaying the object itself.

Editing the inserted object

To resize or move the object, click to select it. To move the object, click it and then drag it to a new location. To resize the object, drag a corner handle.

To edit the object, right-click it and select an option from the menu:

Cut: Select to cut the object from the drawing to the Clipboard. The object is erased from the drawing.

Copy: Select to copy the object from the drawing to the Clipboard.

Delete Object: Select to erase the object from the drawing.

Object > Edit: Launches the source application within IntelliCAD, which allows you to edit the object.

Object > Open: Launches the source application external to IntelliCAD, which allows you to edit the object.

  Command List


Intersection Snap

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Snaps > Set Intersection Snap ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap > Intersection Snap

Keyboard: INTERSECTION

Alias: 3DINTERSECTION

Toggles the Intersection snap setting on or off. When set to ON, you can snap a new entity that you are drawing to the three-dimensional intersection of a combination of entities. You can snap to the combination of an arc, circle, ellipse, elliptical arc, line, polyline, ray, or infinite line. If the target covers only one entity, the program prompts you to select a second entity and then snaps to the point at which the two entities intersect in three-dimensional space.

A	Draw a new entity by snapping to the three-dimensional intersection of another entity.

  Command List


Isometric Plane

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: ISOPLANE

Alias: IS

Shortcut: F5, Ctrl+E

When the isometric grid is turned on, toggles the isometric plane between left, right, and top.

A	Left isoplane

B	Right isoplane.

C	Top isoplane.

Isoplane: Left · Right [Top] · <Switch to Top>: To switch to the next isoplane, press Enter. To switch to the left isoplane, choose Left. To switch to the right isoplane, choose Right. To switch to the top isoplane, choose Top.

TIP Use the Style option of the Snap command to turn on isometric drawing mode. Turn on the grid to help you visualize the isometric grid. Draw isometric circles with the Isocircle option of the Ellipse command.

  Command List


Join

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Join ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Join

Keyboard: JOIN

Joins two entities (two or more lines or two or more arcs) into one entity. You cannot join lines with arcs and vice versa.

Select arc or line for joining: Select the line or arc that you want to join with another.

To join lines

A Select the first line you want to join. B Select the second parallel line you want to join.	Result.
Select the line you want to join.

Select lines for attempted join: Select the lines you want to join to the first line. The lines must be parallel to the first line, and they are extended until they are joined.

To join arcs

A Select the first arc you want to join. B Select the second concentric arc you want to join.	Result.
Select the arc you want to join.

Select arcs for counterclockwise join: Select the arcs you want to join to the first arc. To join arcs, the arcs must be part of a circle.

  Command List


Layer

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: LAYER

Alias: -LA

Creates named drawing layers and assigns color and linetype properties to those layers. Also sets the current layer, freezes/thaws, locks/unlocks, and turns layers on/off.

An example showing different layers of a drawing.

Layer: ? to list · New·Make·Set · Color·Ltype · ON·OFF · Freeze·Thaw · LOck·Unlock: To create a new layer, choose New. To create a new layer and make it the current layer, choose Make. To set another layer as the current layer, choose Set. To set the color of entities drawn in the layer, choose Color. To set the linetype of entities drawn in the layer, choose Ltype. To turn the layer on or off, choose ON or OFF. To freeze or thaw the layer, choose Freeze or Thaw. To lock or unlock the layer, choose LOck or Unlock. To list the layers in the current drawing, choose ?.

To create a new layer

Choose New.

Names for new layers: Enter a name for the new layer. You can create more than one layer at a time by separating the names with a comma, such as: TITLE,DIM,TEXT.

Layer: ? to list · New·Make·Set · Color·Ltype · ON·OFF · Freeze·Thaw · LOck·Unlock: To continue working with layers, choose another option, or press Enter to exit the command.

To make a new layer the current layer

Choose Make.

New layer to make current: Enter a name for the new layer. You can make more than one layer at a time by separating the names with a comma, such as: TITLE,DIM,TEXT.

Layer: ? to list · New·Make·Set · Color·Ltype · ON·OFF · Freeze·Thaw · LOck·Unlock: To continue working with layers, choose another option, or press Enter to exit the command.

To change the current layer

Choose Set.

Layer to set as current <name>: Enter the name of the layer you want to set as current. The current layer is displayed in angle brackets.

Layer: ? to list · New·Make·Set · Color·Ltype · ON·OFF · Freeze·Thaw · LOck·Unlock: To continue working with layers, choose another option, or press Enter to exit the command.

To change the color of entities drawn on a layer

Choose Color.

Color: Enter the name of the color you want to use for entities drawn in this layer.

Layer(s) to be RED <name>: Enter the layers to which you want the color applied. The current layer is displayed in angle brackets. You can change the color of more than one layer at a time by separating the names with a comma, such as: TITLE,DIM,TEXT.

Layer: ? to list · New·Make·Set · Color·Ltype · ON·OFF · Freeze·Thaw · LOck·Unlock: To continue working with layers, choose another option, or press Enter to exit the command.

To change the linetype of entities drawn on a layer

Choose Ltype.

Linetype: ? to list · <CONTINUOUS>: Enter the linetype. The current linetype is displayed in angle brackets. To list the linetypes defined in the current drawing, choose ?.

Layer(s) for linetype CONTINUOUS <name>: Enter the layers to which you want the linetype applied. The current linetype is displayed in angle brackets.  You can change the linetype of more than one layer at a time by separating the names with a comma, such as: TITLE,DIM,TEXT.

Layer: ? to list · New·Make·Set · Color·Ltype · ON·OFF · Freeze·Thaw · LOck·Unlock: To continue working with layers, choose another option, or press Enter to exit the command.

To turn a layer on or off

When a layer is turned on, you can draw and edit entities, and all entities on the layer will print or plot. When a layer is turned off, those entities are invisible. You can edit entities (including erasing them) on layers that are turned off, but we recommend that you freeze and thaw layers, rather than turn them on and off.

Choose ON or OFF.

Layer(s) to turn [On or Off]: Select the layer you want to turn on or off.  You can turn on or off more than one layer at a time by separating the names with a comma, such as: TITLE,DIM,TEXT.

Layer: ? to list · New·Make·Set · Color·Ltype · ON·OFF · Freeze·Thaw · LOck·Unlock: To continue working with layers, choose another option, or press Enter to exit the command.

To freeze or thaw a layer

A layer that is frozen does not display or print. When you thaw a layer, the layer is regenerated and displayed. We recommend that you freeze or thaw layers for longer periods; for shorter periods, turn layers on and off .

Choose Freeze or Thaw.

Layer(s) to [Freeze or Thaw]: Select the layer you want to freeze or thaw.  You can freeze or thaw more than one layer at a time by separating the names with a comma, such as: TITLE,DIM,TEXT.

Layer: ? to list · New·Make·Set · Color·Ltype · ON·OFF · Freeze·Thaw · LOck·Unlock: To continue working with layers, choose another option, or press Enter to exit the command.

To lock or unlock a layer

You can see a layer that is locked, but you cannot edited it, and you cannot draw new entities on a locked layer. You can lock or unlock more than one layer at a time by separating the names with a comma, such as: TITLE,DIM,TEXT.

Choose LOck or Unlock.

Layer(s) to [Lock or Unlock]: Select the layer you want to lock or unlock.

Layer: ? to list · New·Make·Set · Color·Ltype · ON·OFF · Freeze·Thaw · LOck·Unlock: To continue working with layers, choose another option, or press Enter to exit the command.

  Command List


Lighting

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Rendering > Lighting ( [image])

Menu: View > Rendering > Lighting

Keyboard: LIGHTING

Alias: LIGHT

Defines light sources and effects that will illuminate your model when it is rendered using the Full Render command. Lighting settings are saved in the drawing file.

NOTE Lighting is used by the Render command, but only for illuminating the surface of the model and the base, not for creating shadows or reflections. Light sources are not used by the Shade command.

To customize a Studio Light Set

From the six Studio Light Sets on the dialog box, select the one that best illuminates your model. Click the Customize tab to adjust the color, intensity, and position (for sunlight only) of the lights in each set. The Side Main Light With Filler options contain two light sources.

Dialog box control	Description

Current Light	Lists the light sources in the Studio Light Set. The properties of the selected light source are shown in the dialog box and illuminate the example ball in the illustration. You can adjust the main, filler, and ambient light, depending upon which light set you are adjusting. Ambient light is like natural lighting that exists without a direct source.

Color	Specifies a color filter to use for the light source. Click the Color field to display a palette of colors from which to select.

Light Intensity	Determines the relative brightness of the light source.

Sun Angle	The direction from which sunlight faces the center of the model. When you select Sunlight on the Studio Light Set dialog box, you can adjust this angle to between 0° and 360°.

Sun Elevation	The elevation from which sunlight faces the center of the model, relative to an imaginary horizon at the same elevation as the base of the model. When you select Sunlight on the Studio Light Set dialog box, you can adjust this elevation up to 90° above and below the horizon.

The six Studio Light Sets are comprised of four typical lighting sets for presentation images plus one for eye light and one for sunlight. The position of lights in each set are automatically calculated based on the extent of your model (imagine a box around all the entities in your model). The eye light set always shines from the direction of the viewer. The sunlight set is a light that orbits about the center of the model. Sunlight is the only light whose angle can be modified.

  Command List


Limits

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Drawing Limits ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Drawing Limits

Keyboard: LIMITS

Changes the grid and Zoom All boundaries. Limits are two-dimensional points representing the lower left and upper right limits in the World Coordinate System. When the Limcheck system variable is turned on, the limits control the checking of boundaries for the current space.

Limits are off[on]: ON[OFF] · <Lower left corner> <0.0000,0.0000>: To turn limits on, choose ON. To turn limits off, choose OFF. To set new limits, enter the x,y-coordinates for the lower left corner.

Upper right corner <0.0000,0.0000>: To set new limits, enter the x,y-coordinates for the upper right corner.

TIP When the system variable Limcheck is turned on, entering limits restricts the coordinates in which you can enter entities to within the rectangular area defined. Regardless of whether Limcheck is turned on, the limits determine the area of the drawing that displays a grid, and restricts the area that is displayed when you choose Zoom or Zoom All.

  Command List


Line

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Line ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Line

Keyboard: LINE

Alias: L, 3DLINE

Draws straight lines of any length. You can specify the two-dimensional or three-dimensional coordinates for the start or end points by entering the x,y,z-coordinates of the point.

A	Specify the start point of the line.

B	Specify the end point.

Start of line: Specify the start point of the line.

Angle · Length · <End point>: Specify the end point of the line. To specify the angle of the line, choose Angle. To specify the length of the line, choose Length.

Angle · Length · Follow · Undo · <End point>: To continue drawing line segments (the end point of each segment is the start point of the next segment), specify the next end point. To specify the length of the next line segment, choose Length. To

NOTE The Follow option uses the angle stored in the Lastangle system variable.

Angle · Length · Follow · Close · Undo · <End point>: To continue drawing line segments (the start point of each line segment is the end point of the previous segment), specify the next end point. To specify the length of the next line segment, choose Length. To continue the line in the direction in which you drew the last segment, choose Follow. To create a closed entity, after you draw two or more line segments, choose Close. To erase the last line segment you drew, choose Undo.

TIP The Follow option uses the angle stored in the Lastangle system variable.

The second time you use the Line command, the initial prompt is:

ENTER to use last point · Follow · <Start of line>: To continue drawing from the end point of the last line segment, press Enter. To draw the line at the same angle as the last drawing operation, choose Follow. To draw the start of a new line segment, specify a point.

  Command List


To draw a line by first specifying the length

Choose Length.

Length of line: Enter the length of the line.

Angle of line: Specify the angle of the line, or enter the angle (in degrees).

Angle · Length · Follow · Undo · <End point>: To continue drawing line segments (the start point of each line segment is the end point of the previous segment), specify the next end point. To specify the length of the next line segment, choose Length.

TIP The Follow option uses the angle stored in the Lastangle system variable.

  Command List


To draw a line by first specifying the angle

Choose Angle.

Angle of line: Specify the angle of the line, or enter the angle (in degrees).

Length of line: Specify the length of the line, or enter the length (in drawing units).

Angle · Length · Follow · Undo · <End point>: To continue drawing line segments (the start point of each line segment is the end point of the previous segment), specify the next end point. To specify the length of the next line segment, choose Length.

  Command List


To continue drawing lines

Specify the end point of the next segment. To specify the angle or the length of the line, choose Angle or Length. To draw the next segment in the same direction as the previous segment, choose Follow. To erase the last segment drawn, choose Undo.

  Command List


Linetype

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: LINETYPE

Alias: -LT

Defines linetypes (sequences of alternating line segments, dots, and spaces), loads them from libraries, and sets the current linetype.

A	Continuous linetype.

B	Dashed linetype.

C	Dotted linetype.

D	Center linetype (one dot and one dash).

E	Phantom linetype (two dots and one dash).

Linetype: ? to list · Create · Load · Set: To create a new linetype, choose Create. To load a linetype from a library, choose Load. To specify the current linetype, choose Set. To display a list of the linetypes defined, choose ?.

To create a new linetype

Choose Create.

Name for new linetype: Enter the name of the new linetype. The Create or Append Linetype File dialog box appears. Select an existing linetype definition (.lin) file or type the name of a new file. Click Save.

Linetype description: Type a description of the linetype, such as "Telephone line."

Linetype definition (positive numbers for lines, negative for spaces):

A, Type a number to indicate the length of a line dash. Type a negative number for the length of a space. Type 0 (zero) for a dot. Separate numbers with a comma. There must be a gap after each line or space. The A means the ends of the linetype will be adjusted to fit between two points. For example, 2,-1,0,-1 draws a dash 2 units long, followed by a gap 1 unit long, followed by a dot, followed by another gap 1 unit long.

Linetype "name" was defined in filename.lin. A message is displayed, reporting that your linetype definition was saved in the .lin file. If there is an error in the linetype code you type, you will receive an error message indicating that  syntax errors were found.

To load a linetype

Choose Load.

Enter linetype to load: Enter the name of the linetype you want to load. The Create or Append Linetype File dialog box appears. Select the linetype definition file (.lin), and then click Open.

Linetype name loaded. To use the linetype, you must use the Set option or use the Linetype command to assign the linetype to a layer name.

To set the current linetype

Choose Set.

? to list linetypes in drawing · Linetype to set as current <CONTINUOUS>: Enter the name of the linetype. The current linetype is displayed in angle brackets.

To view a list of available linetypes

Choose ?.

The Select Linetype File dialog box appears. Select the name of the file (.lin) containing the linetypes you want to view. The linetypes included in the file you select are displayed in the Prompt History window.

  Command List


List Entity Information

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Inquiry > List Entity Info( [image])

Menu: Tools > Inquiry > List Entity Info

Keyboard: LIST

Alias: LI, LS

Lists information for selected entities in the Prompt History window. The program displays the type of entity, the layer on which it resides, the color and linetype in which it is drawn, and its x,y,z position relative to the current User Coordinate Systems (UCS). Other information displayed depends on the type of entity selected. For example, the information listed for a circle includes the radius, circumference, and area; the information for a line includes the length.

SCroll · SOrt · Tracking · <Select entities to list>: Select the entity for which you want to obtain database information. To change how information is displayed (scrolled or paginated), choose SCroll. To alphabetically sort the database information by entity type, choose SOrt. To change the number of lines tracked, choose Tracking.

To change how information is listed

Choose SCroll. The current setting is displayed in the command bar.

Paginate[SCroll] · Tracking · <Select entities to list>: Select the entity for which you want to display database information. To paginate the display when it is currently set to scroll, choose PAginate. To scroll the display when it is currently set to paginate, choose SCroll.

To display information sorted or sequentially

Choose SOrt.

SCroll · SEquential · Tracking · <Select entities to list>: Select the entity for which you want to obtain database information. To change how information is displayed (scrolled or paginated), choose SCroll[Paginate]. To display the database information sequentially, choose SEquential. To change the number of lines tracked, choose Tracking.

To change the number of lines tracked

You can specify the number of lines tracked, or listed, by changing the tracking. If the number of lines to list exceeds the number of lines you specify to track, the program truncates the information at the top of the list.

Choose Tracking.

Number of command lines to track <256>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the number of lines to tracked, enter a new value.

TIP You can also specify the number of lines to track by choosing Settings > Options.

  Command List


Log File Name

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: LOGFILENAME

Names the file you want created when you use LOGFILEON to save information in the Prompt History window.

LOGFILEON writes all commands and prompts in the Prompt History window to a text file. To begin writing information to the text file, use LOGFILEON. To stop writing information to the text file, use LOGFILEOFF.

  Command List


Log File Off

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: LOGFILEOFF

Stops writing the text file started with LOGFILEON. LOGFILEON writes all commands and prompts in the Prompt History window to a text file. To name the text file, use LOGFILENAME.

  Command List


Log File On

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: LOGFILEON

Writes all commands and prompts in the Prompt History window to a text file. To name the text file, use LOGFILENAME. To stop writing information to the text file, use LOGFILEOFF.

  Command List


Linetype Scale

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: LTSCALE

Alias: LTS

Sets the scale factor you want to apply to all linetypes within the current drawing.

An example of dashed line with different scales.

New scale factor <1.0000>: Enter the new scale. A higher number draws more linetype units (the dash/dot combination) per drawing unit.

  Command List


Mail

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: File > Send Mail

Keyboard: MAIL

Activates your mail program so you can send an IntelliCAD drawing file by electronic mail. The Send Mail command supports any Message Application Programming Interface (MAPI-compliant) mail program (such as Microsoft Exchange or Outlook, Qualcomm Eudora, and Lotus CC:Mail). For more information about how to send a drawing file by electronic mail, refer to the documentation included with your mail program.

If you have more than one mail profile on your computer, you will be prompted to choose a profile before you can send the drawing.

NOTE You cannot mail a drawing file using this command if your system is configured with only an Internet mail system, such as Netscape Communicator, or any version of Microsoft Internet Explorer older than version 4.0. However, Microsoft Internet Explorer version 4.0 and higher includes Microsoft Exchange, making it compatible with the Send Mail command.

  Command List


Copy Entity Formatting

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Copy Entity Formatting ( [image])

Keyboard: MATCHPROP

Alias: MA

Duplicates properties from one entity onto another. Only the properties are copied, not the entity itself. The properties copied are color, layer, linetype, thickness, text, and dimensioning.

A Select the entity with the properties you want to copy. B Select the entity you want to change.	Result.
Select entity to copy properties from: Select the entity that has the properties you want to copy.

Select entities to copy properties to: Select the entities you want to change, and then either right-click the mouse or press Enter to end the command.

  Command List


Materials

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Rendering > Materials ( [image])

Menu: View > Rendering > Materials

Keyboard: MATERIALS

Alias: RMAT

Assigns material properties to entities, enhancing the visual appearance of the model when it is rendered with the Full Render command. Use Materials to define the reflectance and transparency properties of surfaces in your model when it is rendered. The default material is Shiny Plastic.

NOTE The Shade and Render commands do not use material properties.

When a model is rendered, the appearance of any point on any surface is dependent upon several factors, such as lighting, orientation to the viewer and light sources, and material properties. The color of the surfaces is taken from the color of the entities that define those surfaces. How the model is illuminated is controlled by the Lighting command. Using the Materials command, you assign different material types, such as molded plastic, metal, or glass, to model surfaces, which  causes them to look more realistic when illuminated.

Material property definitions are saved in the drawing file.

To define or modify material properties

Select entities: Select the entities for which you want to define or modify material properties, and then right-click the mouse or press Enter. On the Materials dialog box, define or modify the reflectance type and transparency of the selected entities. The next time you render the model with the Full Render command, the selected entities use the new material properties.

Dialog box element	Description

Reflectance Type	Determines how light reflects off surfaces in the model. These reflectance types can be used to simulate many materials other than those implied by the names.

Shiny Plastic:	The default for all entities, this material is of medium reflectance and is not transparent by default.

Shiny Metal:	This material is reflective and is not transparent by default.

Dull Metal:	This material is not reflective and is not transparent by default.

Mirror:	This material is reflective and is not transparent by default. The Mirror setting is the only one that demonstrates true reflective behavior.

Glass	This material is less reflective than mirror and is refractive by default. The Glass setting is the only one that demonstrates true refractive behavior.

Transparency	Determines how much of an underlying image (the base, for example) is visible through the surface of the selected entity.

TIP To make your model render more efficiently, avoid glass materials and use the transparency setting instead. It takes significantly longer to calculate true refractive behavior than basic transparency. True refractive behavior is not necessary for most models. For example, the amount of distortion created by window glass in a building is trivial, so it would not be efficient to make windows in a model truly refractive.

  Command List


Measure

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Measure ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Measure

Keyboard: MEASURE

Divides a selected entity into segments by placing markers (points or blocks) at specified intervals along its length or circumference. The Measure command starts placing markers at the closest end point to where you select the entity.

A Select the entity you want to measure.	Result.
You can measure lines, arcs, circles, and polylines. You cannot measure ellipses, elliptical arcs, rays, and infinite lines using this command. You measure a circle along its circumference starting from the Angle Base value defined using the Drawing Settings command. Therefore, if you set your Angle Base to zero, you begin measuring the circle from the 3 o’clock position. Measure polylines starting from their first vertex.

TIP  Use the Measure command to place points on an entity, and then use Point Snap to draw lines by snapping from point to point along the measured entity. Remove the measure points on the first entity by using the Delete command and choosing Previous Selection from the Prompt Box.

To place points at regular intervals along an entity

Select entity to measure: Select the entity along which you want to place points.

Blocks · <Segment length>: Enter the length at which you want measurement points placed on the entity. To place blocks along each measurement point, choose Blocks.

TIP  To see the measurement points on the entity, change the settings for points. Choose Settings > Drawing Settings, and then click the Entity Creation tab.

To use blocks as the measurement points

A Select the entity you want to measure. B Blocks placed along the entity to measure the intervals you select.	Result.
Choose Blocks.

? to list blocks in drawing · <Block to insert>: Enter the name of the block you want to place, which must already exist in the drawing. To list the names of all blocks in the drawing, choose ?.

Align blocks with entity? <Y>: To force the block orientation to conform to the shape or angle of the selected entity, press Enter. For example, if you are measuring a circle, the orientation of the block would be rotated about the center of the circle.  To place blocks independent of the shape or angle of the selected entity, type N or choose No-Do not align.

Segment length: Enter the length at which you want the blocks placed along the entity, measured in the drawing units.

  Command List


Menu

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: MENU

Displays the Open Menu dialog box so you can load menu files to use with IntelliCAD. Menu files are ASCII files that define commands and toolbars. You can load both IntelliCAD (*.icm) and AutoCAD (*.mnu, *.mns) menu files with this command.

You customize a menu using the Customize dialog box, and then save your changes as an IntelliCAD menu file (*.icm).

  Command List


Menu Load

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Tools > Customize > Menu tab

Keyboard: MENULOAD

Displays the Customize dialog box so you can import a menu file or modify the current menu. Menu files are ASCII files that define commands and toolbars. You can load both IntelliCAD (*.icm) and AutoCAD (*.mnu, *.mns) menu files with this command, customize them, and then save or export your changes as IntelliCAD menu files (*.icm).

  Command List


Menu Unload

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Tools > Customize > Menu tab

Keyboard: MENUUNLOAD

Displays the Customize dialog box so you can export a menu file you customized. Menu files are ASCII files that define commands and toolbars. You can export a menu file as an IntelliCAD menu file (*.icm).

  Command List


Polygon Mesh

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Polygon Mesh ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Polygon Mesh

Keyboard: MESH

Alias: 3DMESH

Creates a three-dimensional mesh made of polygons. You specify its size (by primary and secondary axes) and the location of each vertex in the mesh.

A	The number of vertices along the primary mesh axis, the M-direction of the mesh.

B	The number of vertices along the secondary mesh axis, the N-direction of the mesh.

A mesh is defined by the location of vertices along the primary and secondary axes (M and N, respectively), beginning the vertex with 0,0. Define the coordinates for each vertex in row M before going on to define the vertices in row M + 1, and so on. A polygon mesh is open on one side by default, but you can close it using the Edit Polyline command.

To create a polygon mesh

Number of vertices along primary mesh axis (between 2 and 256): Enter the number of vertices along the M-direction of the mesh.

Vertices along secondary mesh axis (between 2 and 256): Enter the number of vertices along the N-direction of the mesh.

Vertex (1, 1): Select a point for the first vertex. The numbers in parentheses indicate that this point is the first vertex on the primary mesh axis and the first vertex on the secondary mesh axis.

Vertex (1, 2): Select a point for the next vertex. The numbers in parentheses indicate that this point is the first vertex on the primary mesh axis and the second vertex on the secondary mesh axis.

Vertex (2, 1): Select a point for the next vertex. The numbers in parentheses indicate that this point is the second vertex on the primary mesh axis and the first vertex on the secondary mesh axis.

The program continues to prompt you to select additional vertices until you have defined all of the vertices on the primary and secondary axes.

  Command List


Midpoint Snap

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Snaps > Set Midpoint Snap ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap > Midpoint Snap

Keyboard: MIDPOINT

Toggles the Midpoint snap on or off. When set to ON, you can precisely place an entity on the midpoint of another entity. You can snap to the midpoint of an arc, line, polyline segment, plane, and infinite line.

A	Snap a new line to the midpoint of a line.

  Command List


Multiple Insert

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: MINSERT

Creates a rectangular pattern from multiple copies of a block. Copies of the block are placed up and to the right from the point you specify.

A	Select the insertion point for the block.

B	Specify the number of rows you want inserted.

C	Specify the number of columns you want inserted.

? to list blocks in drawing · BROWSE · EXPLORE · <Block to insert> < >: Type the name of the block to insert, or press Enter to place the current block (if displayed). To list all blocks in the current drawing, choose ?. To insert a block that you have saved to disk, choose Browse. To display the Drawing Explorer with a list of blocks in the active drawings, choose Explore.

Multiple blocks · <Insertion point for block>: Select the insertion point for the block, the default selection. To insert multiple copies of the block in a rectangular pattern, choose Multiple.

To insert a block in a rectangular pattern

Select the insertion point for the block.

Done · XYZ · X scale factor <1.0000>: To accept the current value for the x scale factor, press Enter. To use another value, type a number. To insert the block without changing the x,y,z scale factors, choose Done.

Y scale factor: <Equal to X scale (1.0000)>: To accept the current value for the y scale, press Enter. To use another value, type a number.

Rotation angle for block <0 >: To accept the current value for the rotation angle, press Enter. To use another value, type a number. This value sets the rotation angle of both individual blocks and an array of blocks.

Number of rows in the array <1>: Enter the number of rows of blocks to create.

Number of columns <1>: Enter the number of columns of blocks to create.

If the value for the number of rows or columns is greater than 1, the following prompts appear:

Vertical distance between rows, or spacing rectangle: Enter the distance you want between rows by typing a value or by specifying two points on the screen.

Horizontal distance between columns: Enter the distance you want between columns by typing a value or by specifying two points on the screen.

To insert multiple copies of the same rectangular pattern

Choose Multiple.

Insertion point for first block: Place the first block in the pattern by selecting a point on the screen.

Done · XYZ · X scale factor <1.0000>: To accept the current value for the x scale factor, press Enter. To use another value, type a number. To insert the block without changing the x,y,z scale factors, choose Done.

Number of rows in the array <1>: Enter the number of rows of blocks to create.

Number of columns <1>: Enter the number of columns of blocks to create.

If the value for the number of rows or columns is greater than 1, the following prompts appear:

Vertical distance between rows, or spacing rectangle: Enter the distance you want between rows by typing a value or by specifying two points on the screen.

Horizontal distance between columns: Enter the distance you want between columns by typing a value or by specifying two points on the screen.

Insertion point for next block: Place the next pattern of blocks by selecting a point on the screen. Another rectangular array of blocks is drawn just like the first one. Continue inserting this pattern by selecting insertion points. To end the command, right-click the mouse or press Esc.

To insert a block that was saved to disk

Choose Browse. The Insert Block dialog box is displayed. Find the block from which you want to create a rectangular pattern, and then click Open.

To use the Drawing Explorer to locate a saved block

Choose Explore. The Drawing Explorer is displayed with the Blocks group active. Double-click a block to begin placing a rectangular pattern.

  Command List


Mirror

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Mirror ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Mirror

Keyboard: MIRROR

Alias: MI

Moves or copies the reflected image of selected entities about a line.

A	Select the entity you want to mirror.

B	Select the start of the mirror line.

C	Select the end of the mirror line.

Select entities to mirror: Select the entities you want to mirror, and then press Enter.

Start of mirror line: Select the start point of the mirror line.

End of mirror line: Select the end point of the mirror line. Entities are mirrored about the line created when you specify two points.

Delete the original entities? <N>: To accept the default value, press Enter. To change your response, choose No or Yes. If you choose No, the reflected image is placed into the drawing, and the original entity is retained. If you choose Yes, the reflected image is placed into the drawing, but the original entity is deleted.

TIP You can use the system variable MIRRTEXT to specify how you want text mirrored.

  Command List


Mirror 3D

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > 3D Mirror ( [image])

Menu: Modify > 3D Mirror

Keyboard: MIRROR3D

Draws a reflected image of selected entities about a plane.

A Select the entity you want to mirror. B Select the entity that you want to use to define the mirror plane.	Result.
Select entities: Select the entities you want to mirror, and then press Enter.

Define mirror plane by: Entity · Last · View · Zaxis · XY · YZ · ZX · <3points>: To define the mirror plane by three points, press Enter. To define the mirror plane by selecting an entity, choose Entity. To mirror the selected entities around the last defined mirror plane, choose Last. To define a mirror plane normal to the viewing plane through a selected point, choose View. To define the mirror plane by a point on the plane and a point normal to the plane, choose Zaxis. To define the mirror plane using x,y, y,z, or z,x planes, choose XY, YZ, or ZX.

To define the mirror plane with three points

Choose 3points or select a point. After you select a point, you are prompted to select the second point.

First point on plane: Select the first point on the plane.

Second point on plane: Select the second point.

Third point on plane: Select the third point.

Delete original entities? <N>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To retain the entities, choose Yes. To delete the entities, choose No.

To define the mirror plane by selecting an entity

Choose Entity.

Pick an entity that has an extrusion direction: Select an entity.

Delete original entities? <N>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To retain the entities, choose Yes. To delete the entities, choose No.

To mirror entities using the previous mirror plane

Choose Last.

Delete original entities? <N>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To retain the entities, choose Yes. To delete the entities, choose No.

To mirror entities using the viewing plane of the current viewport

Choose View.

Point on view plane <0,0,0>: Select a point, or enter the x,y,z coordinates.

Delete original entities? <N>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To retain the entities, choose Yes. To delete the entities, choose No.

To define the mirror plane by a point on the plane and a point normal to the plane

Choose Zaxis.

First point on plane: Select the first point on the plane.

Second point on plane: Select the second point.

Third point on plane: Select the third point.

Delete original entities? <N>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To retain the entities, choose Yes. To delete the entities, choose No.

To define the mirror plane using xy, yz or zx planes

Choose XY, YZ, or ZX.

Point on XY[YZ, ZX] plane <0,0,0>:

Delete original entities? <N>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To retain the entities, choose Yes. To delete the entities, choose No.

  Command List


Move

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Move ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Move

Keyboard: MOVE

Alias: M

Moves selected entities to another location in the same drawing.

A Select the entity you want to move. B Select the base point and displacement point.	Result.
Select entities to move: Select the entities you want to move, and then press Enter.

Vector · <Base point>: Specify the point from which you want to move the entities (the starting point of a vector). The distance and direction to move the entities is calculated relative to the starting point. To define the distance and direction for the move with x,y,z values, choose Vector.

Displacement point: Specify the point to which you want to move the entities (the ending point of the vector). To move the entity from the selection point to the Base point, press Enter.

To define the x,y,z displacement point

Choose Vector.

Enter direction vector (x, y, z): Enter the x,y,z value to define the distance and direction in which to move the selected entities. For example, entering a value of 3,3,2 moves the entities at a distance of 3 units in the x direction, 3 units in the y direction, and 2 units in the z direction.

  Command List


Move Entity Data

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Data > Move Entity Data ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Entity Data > Move Entity Data

Keyboard: MOVEEDATA

Moves program information assigned to one entity to another entity. This data is assigned to entities by programs that work with IntelliCAD, such as architectural or mechanical engineering design programs.

CAUTION Using any of the Entity Data commands poses a risk of altering your program data in such a way that may make it unusable by the original program.

To move entity data

Move Entity Data: ? to list application names · <Name of application>: Type the name of the program whose data you want to move, or choose ? to list application names to display a list of programs.

Select entity from which to move data: Select the entity from which you want to extract entity data, and then press Enter.

Select entities to Entity Data will be moved: Select the entity to which you want the entity data assigned, and then press Enter. The data for the selected program is removed from the first entity and transferred to the second.

  Command List


Make Snapshot

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Tools > Make Snapshot ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Make Snapshot

Keyboard: MSNAPSHOT

Alias: MSLIDE

Displays the Create Snapshot dialog box so you can create a slide (*.sld) of the drawing area.

  Command List


Model Space

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Workspaces > Model space, with floating viewports option ( [image])

Menu: View > Workspaces > Model space, with floating viewports option

Keyboard: MSPACE

Alias: MS

The primary drawing workspace in which you create entities. Use model space to create two-dimensional drawings or three-dimensional models. Use paper space to print or plot a drawing in a finished layout.

 Before you can use model space, TILEMODE must be turned off (type TILEMODE OFF).  Also, you must use MVIEW to create viewports before you can switch the drawing environment.

  Command List


Multiline Text

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Multiline Text ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Multiline Text

Keyboard: MTEXT

Alias: T, MT

Creates paragraph text entities.

A Select the first corner for the block of text. B Select the opposite corner.	Result.
To place a paragraph of text

Mtext: First corner for block of text: Specify the first corner to begin defining the area where you want the paragraph text to appear.

Justification · Rotation ·  Style · Height · Direction · Width · <Opposite corner for block of text>: Specify the second corner to define the area where you want the paragraph text to appear. To  change the alignment, choose Justification. To change the angle of the text block, choose Rotation. To change the text style, choose Style. To change the height of the text, choose Height. To change the direction of the text block, choose Direction. To change the width of the text, choose Width.

See Font Samples for a list of all the fonts available in IntelliCAD.

After you select the insertion point for the paragraph text, the MText dialog box appears.

Dialog box element	Description

Attachment point	The origin of the paragraph text. This is where a grip will appear so you can move the paragraph later.

Style	Any predefined text style you have in your drawing. Text styles are created and managed with the Explorer Text Styles command.

Rotation Angle	The angle at which the paragraph will be rotated when placed. The units and direction are defined with the Drawing Units tab on the Drawing Settings dialog box.

Drawing direction	The direction in which the text is created within the area you define.

Height	The text height, measured in the linear units of the drawing, which is defined with the Drawing Units tab on the Drawing Settings dialog box.

  Command List


Multiple

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: MULTIPLE

Repeats the command you enter next until you press Esc. Only the command name is repeated; respond to any prompts or dialog boxes that appear each time the command repeats. You can only use MULTIPLE only with commands you enter at the keyboard, not with commands that use dialog boxes.

NOTE MULTIPLE is not valid in LISP. See the Developer Reference section of Help for more information.

  Command List


Paper Space Views

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Paper Space Views ( [image])

Menu: View > Paper Space Views

Keyboard: MVIEW

Alias: MV

Creates and controls viewports in paper space. TILEMODE must be turned off before you use this command (type TILEMODE OFF).The number of viewports you can create is limited only by your system resources. To create tiled viewports, turn TILEMODE back on (type TILEMODE ON).

An example of multiple viewports.

Create viewports: ON · OFF · Fit · 2 · 3 · 4 ·  <First corner>: Specify the first corner of the viewport. To turn viewports on, choose ON. To turn viewports off, choose OFF. To create a viewport that fills the screen, choose Fit. To create two horizontal or vertical viewports, choose 2. To create three viewports, choose 3. To create four viewports, choose 4.

To define the boundaries of a viewport

Specify the first corner of the viewport.

Opposite corner: Specify the opposite corner of the viewport.

To turn viewports on or off

Choose ON or OFF.

Select viewports to turn on[off]: Select the edge of the viewport to turn on or off, and then press Enter. Doing this does not delete the viewport; it simply turns it off.

To create a viewports that fills the screen

Choose Fit to view.

To create multiple horizontal or vertical viewports

A	Two vertical viewports.

B	Two horizontal viewports.

Choose Create 2 viewports

Two [Three] [Four] viewports: Horizontal · <Vertical>: To create vertical viewports, choose Vertical or press Enter. To create horizontal viewports, choose Horizontal.

Fit to screen · <First corner of bounding rectangle>: Specify the first corner of the viewport. To divide the screen into two viewports of the same size, choose Fit to screen.

To create three viewports

A	Three horizontal viewports.

B	Three vertical viewports.

C	One horizontal viewport above two vertical viewports.

D	One horizontal viewport below two vertical viewports.

E	One vertical viewport to the left of two horizontal viewports.

F	One vertical viewport to the right of two horizontal viewports.

Choose Create 3 viewports.

Three viewports · Horizontal · Vertical · Above · Below · Left · <Right>: To create one large viewport on the right and two smaller viewports on the left, choose Right. To create three  horizontal viewports of the same size, choose Horizontal. To create three vertical viewports of the same size, choose Vertical. To create one large viewport on top and two smaller viewports on the bottom, choose Above. To create one large viewport on the bottom and two smaller viewports on top, choose Below. To create one large viewport on the left and two smaller viewports on the right, choose Left.

Fit to screen · <First corner of bounding rectangle>: Specify the first corner of the viewport. To create three viewports that fill the screen, choose Fit to screen.

To create four viewports

Four viewports

Choose Create 3 viewports.

Fit to screen · <First corner of bounding rectangle>: Specify the first corner of the viewport. To divide the screen into four viewports of the same size, choose Fit to screen.

  Command List


Nearest Snap

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Snaps > Set Nearest Snap ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap > Nearest Snap

Keyboard: NEAREST

Toggles the Nearest Snap on or off. After you turn it on, the pointer changes to a square at the center of the crosshairs. Any points or vertices you specify are snapped to the closest spot on the entity nearest the center of the crosshairs (within the square).

A	Snap a line you are drawing to the nearest entity.

You can use Nearest Snap to snap to arcs, lines, points, polyline segments, or rays or to the closest corner of a plane or three-dimensional face.

  Command List


New Drawing

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > New ( [image])

Keyboard: NEW

Shortcut: Ctrl+N

Alias: N

Creates a new drawing based on the default template, which is defined in the Prototype Drawing field on the Tools > Options dialog box. A blank drawing window is displayed.

TIP You can also use the NEWWIZ command to create a new drawing with the New Drawing Wizard.

  Command List


New Drawing Wizard

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: File > New

Keyboard: NEWWIZ

Alias: DDNEW

Starts the New Drawing Wizard, which leads you through the process of either creating a new drawing or using a template with predefined settings. Using a template is a good way to establish and standardize drawings with the settings you use most often, such as units of measure, layer names, dimension settings, special aliases, and so on.

To use a template, create a drawing with all the settings you want to use as your standard for creating drawings. Save the drawing with an appropriate name, and place it in a template folder on a server.

The next time you create a new drawing, select Use A Template Drawing, then click Browse to find and select the template drawing you created. The new drawing you create will have the same settings as your template drawing.

  Command List


Point Snap

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Snaps > Set Point Snap ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap > Point Snap

Keyboard: NODE

Toggles the Point Snap on or off. After you turn it on, the pointer changes to a square at the center of the crosshairs. Any points or vertices you specify are snapped to the point nearest the center of the crosshairs (within the square).

Snap to a point entity.

TIP  Use Measure to place points on an entity, and then use Point Snap to draw lines by snapping from point to point along the measured entity. Remove the measure points on the first entity by using the Delete command and choosing Previous Selection from the Prompt Box.

  Command List


Clear Entity Snaps

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Snaps > Clear Entity Snaps ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap > All Entity Snaps Off

Keyboard: NONE

Turns all Entity Snaps off.

  Command List


Links

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Edit > Links

Keyboard: OLELINKS

Lists, updates, and modifies linked objects within a drawing file. You can embed objects such as files created with other programs into drawing files using the Insert Object command. If these embedded objects are linked to the drawing file, you can update their display when the contents of the embedded file is changed.

Dialog box control	Description

Links	Lists the objects currently embedded in the drawing, the type of object embedded, and how the object is updated.

Update Now	Manually updates the embedded object. If the content of the source file changes, the display of the object is updated. For example, if you embed an object, and then open the originating program and edit the file, you can use Update Now the next time you open the IntelliCAD drawing so that the changes are displayed.

Open Source	Starts the program in which the embedded object was created and loads the object for editing. For example, if you embedded a Visio Technical schematic in an IntelliCAD drawing, clicking Open Source starts Visio Technical and loads the schematic.

Change Source	Lets you change the embedded file without having to delete and re-insert it in the drawing. Click Change Source, and then find the file you want to embed. The new object replaces the old one on the list.

Break Link	Disconnects the object from the source file. The object is not removed from the drawing; only the connection to the source file is severed. After you break the link, you cannot re-establish it, and you cannot edit the file with its originating program by double-clicking the object.

Source	Shows the directory path to the selected object in the Links list.

Type	Shows what kind of object is embedded. The type usually indicates what program originally created the object.

Update	Sets the update status to Automatic or Manual. Automatic updates the object every time you open the drawing. Manual leaves the object in the same state it was in when embedded or last updated until you choose Update Now to refresh the contents.

TIP Right-clicking an object opens a menu of commands you can use for the object.

  Command List


Open Drawing

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Open ( [image])

Menu: File > Open

Keyboard: OPEN

Shortcut: Ctrl+O

Alias: OP

Displays the Open Drawing dialog box so you can open an existing drawing. You can open both DWG and DXF files with this command. To find files on another drive, use the Look In list. You can navigate to find the file name you want, or type the name into the File Name field. The Preview window lets you see a thumbnail of a drawing before you open it.

  Command List


Open External Drawing

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: OPENEXT

Loads a DWG file into memory without opening it in IntelliCAD.

  Command List


Orthogonal

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Settings > Draw Orthogonal ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Draw Orthogonal

Keyboard: ORTHOGONAL

Shortcut: F8

Alias: OR, ORTHO

Constrains drawing elements so that you can draw only lines aligned with the grid. When drawing lines, the points are constrained and are drawn to the nearest grid. You cannot use keyboard commands to draw orthographically; you must use the mouse.

A	A line drawn with orthogonal turned off.

B	A line drawn with orthogonal turned on.

>ON · OFF · Toggle <Off>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the current setting, choose ON, OFF, or Toggle.

  Command List


Pan

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Pan ( [image])

Menu: View > Pan

Keyboard: PAN

Alias: P, -P, RTPAN

Drags the display in the viewport so you can see areas not visible in the window.

Left · Right · Up · Down · PGLeft · PGRight · PGUp · PGDown · <Pan base point:> Specify the pan base point, which is the point from which you want to move the display. To move the display to the left, choose Left. To move the display to the right, choose Right. To move the display up, choose Up. To move the display down, choose Down. To move the display left one page, choose PGLeft. To move the display right one page, choose PGRight. To move the display up one page, choose PGUp. To move the display down one page, choose PGDown.

A Select the pan from point. B Select the pan to point.	Result.
TIP You can also use the arrow keys, PgUp, and PgDn to move the display without using the Pan command.

To specify the distance to pan

Specify a point from which you want the display moved.

Pan displacement point: Specify the to which you want the display moved. The difference between the base point and the displacement point indicates the distance and direction you want to move the display.

  Command List


Parallel

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Parallel ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Parallel

Keyboard: PARALLEL

Alias: O, OFFSET

Creates a parallel or offset copy of curves and lines. A true ellipse or elliptical arc is created when you offset an ellipse or elliptical arc.

A Specify the distance from the original entity for the parallel copy. B Select the entity that you want to parallel. C Select the side where you want the parallel entity located.	Result.
Parallel: ENTER for Through point · <Distance>: To specify the distance you want the parallel copy offset enter a value or specify two points. To specify a point through which you want the parallel copy offset, choose Through point.

To specify the offset distance

Enter the offset distance or specify two points.

Select entity: Select the entity that you want to parallel.

Both sides · <Side for parallel copy>: Select the side where you want the parallel copy located (right or left side). To create a parallel copy on both sides, choose Both sides.

Select entity: Select another entity that you want to parallel.

To specify a point through which the entity is offset

Choose Through point.

Select entity: Select the entity that you want to parallel.

Through point: Select the point through which you want the copy to pass.

Select entity: Select another entity that you want to parallel.

To create parallel entities from polylines

A	Select the entity you want to parallel.

B	Select the side on which you want the parallel entity located.

Select entity: Select the polyline entity that you want to parallel.

Wrap · Both sides · <Side for parallel copy>: Select the side where you want the parallel copy located. To wrap the parallel copy around the selected entity, choose Wrap. To create a parallel copy on both sides, choose Both sides.

To wrap the parallel copy

A	Select the entity you want to parallel.

B	To create an inside wrap, choose to Wrap the parallel copy, and select the side.

C	To create an outside wrap, choose to Wrap Both Sides, and select the side.

Choose Wrap. A wrapped copy of the polyline does not cross itself.

Both sides · <Side for parallel copy>: Select the side where you want the parallel copy located. To wrap the parallel copy around the selected entity, choose Wrap. To create a parallel copy on both sides, choose Both sides.

Select entity: Select another entity that you want to parallel.

  Command List


Paste to Clipboard
Paste from Clipboard

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Paste ( [image])

Menu: Edit > Paste

Keyboard: PASTECLIP

Shortcut: Ctrl+V

Places the contents of the Windows Clipboard into the current drawing.

Entities that you copy from one drawing are pasted into the same location in another drawing. Attributes associated with blocks are also copied.

To paste text from the Clipboard into your drawing, use Text. You can also paste text into the Command Bar, but the text you paste must be in the command format that IntelliCAD recognizes.

  Command List


Paste Special

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Edit > Paste Special

Keyboard: PASTESPEC

Shortcut: Ctrl+N

Alias: PA

Places the contents of the Windows Clipboard into the active drawing. The format of the data is unchanged.

  Command List


Perpendicular Snap

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Snaps > Set Perpendicular Snap ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap > Perpendicular Snap

Keyboard: PERPENDICULAR

Toggles the Perpendicular Snap on or off. When set to ON, you can snap a new entity that you are drawing to point perpendicular to another entity.  You can snap a new entity to a point perpendicular  to an arc, circle, line, polyline, ray, plane, and infinite line.

A	The 90-degree angle between the entity you are drawing and the existing entity.

B	The entity to which you are snapping a perpendicular line.

  Command List


Polyface Mesh

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Polyface Mesh ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Polyface Mesh

Keyboard: PFACE

Defines a three-dimensional mesh of arbitrary complexity and surface characteristics. Each face of the mesh consists of four vertices. To create a polyface mesh, specify the vertices first, and then specify which vertex is on which face of the mesh. You can edit a polyface mesh either as a whole entity or by moving vertices one at a time. You cannot use EDITPLINE to edit polyface meshes.

A	Select the first vertex. This is vertex 1 in face 1.

B	Select the second vertex. This is vertex 2 in face 2.

C	Select the third vertex. This is vertex 3 in face 1 and vertex 1 in face 2.

D	Select the fourth vertex. This is vertex 4 in face 1 and vertex 2 in face 2.

E	Select the fifth vertex. This is vertex 3 in face 2 and vertex 1 in face 3.

F	Select the sixth vertex. This is vertex 4 in face 2 and vertex 2 in face 3.

G	Select the seventh vertex. This is vertex 3 in face 3.

H	Select the eighth vertex. This is vertex 4 in face 3.

First vertex for polyface mesh: Select the first vertex point.

Mesh vertex 2: Select the second vertex point.

Mesh vertex 3: Select the third vertex point.

Mesh vertex 4: Continue to select all vertices. After you have finished, press Enter.

Color · Layer · <Face 1, vertex 1>: Enter the mesh vertex number for the first vertex in the first face. To change the color, choose Color. To change the layer, choose Layer.

Color · Layer · <Face 1, vertex 2>: Enter the mesh vertex number for the second vertex in the first face. To change the color, choose Color. To change the layer, choose Layer.

Color · Layer · <Face 1, vertex 3>: Enter the mesh vertex number for the third vertex in the first face. To change the color, choose Color. To change the layer, choose Layer.

Color · Layer · <Face 1, vertex 4>: Enter the mesh vertex number for the fourth vertex in the first face. To change the color, choose Color. To change the layer, choose Layer. To begin defining another face, press Enter.

Color · Layer · <Face 2, vertex 1>: Enter the mesh vertex number for the first vertex in the second face. Continue to enter the mesh vertex numbers to define the faces of the polyface entity. To change the color, choose Color. To change the layer, choose Layer.  To begin defining another face, press Enter. After you have defined all faces of the polyface mesh, press Enter.

To make an edge invisible

To make the edge invisible, use a negative number for the first vertex of the edge. You can use the SPLFRAME system variable to specify whether you want to display invisible edges in the mesh.

  Command List


Plan View

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Plan View ( [image])

Menu: View > Plan View

Keyboard: PLAN

Places the display in Plan View (viewpoint 0,0,1) relative to either the active user coordinate system (UCS), a specified UCS, or the World Coordinate System. The Plan View command affects only the view in the current viewport; coordinates that you enter after you enter Plan View remain relative to the current UCS. The Plan View command does not function when you are using paper space.

In the current UCS, the Plan View command displays the plan view of your model so that it completely fills the current viewport.

In a previously saved UCS, the Plan View command redisplays the previous plan view.

In a World Coordinate System, the Plan View command redisplays the plan view so that it completely fills the World Coordinate System display.

Plan view of: UCS · World · <Current UCS>: To use the current UCS, press Enter. To specify the UCS, choose UCS. To specify the World Coordinate System, choose World.

To specify the UCS

Choose UCS.

? to list · <Name of UCS>: Enter the name of the UCS you want to use. To display a list of defined UCSs, choose ?.

  Command List


Plane

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Plane ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Plane

Keyboard: PLANE

Alias: SO, SOLID

Draws solid polygons. The FILLMODE system variable determines whether the solid is filled; if you do not want to draw filled solid entities, turn FILLMODE off.

Rectangle · Square · Triangle · <First point of solid>: To draw an irregularly shaped solid polygon, select the first point. To draw a rectangular solid, choose Rectangle. To draw a square solid, choose Square. To draw a triangular solid, choose Triangle.

TIP After you draw one solid, you can draw additional solids by selecting the second point for square, rectangular, or triangular solids or by selecting the third point for irregularly shaped solids.

To draw an irregularly shaped solid

A Select the first point on the solid. B Select the second point. C Select the third point. D Select the fourth point.	Result.
Select the first point.

Second point: Select the second point.

Third point of solid: Select the third point.

Fourth point: Select the fourth point.

To draw a rectangular solid

A Select the first point on the solid. B Select a point for the opposite corner. C Select the rotation angle.	Result.
Choose Rectangle.

First point of solid: Select the first point.

Other corner of rectangle: Select the opposite corner of the rectangle.

Rotation angle for solid <0.0000>: To accept the default value or enter a new value, press Enter.

To draw a solid square

A Select the first corner of the solid square. B Select the second corner.	Result.
Choose Square.

First point of solid: Select the first point.

Second corner of square: Select the second corner of the square.

To draw a triangular solid

A Select the first corner of the solid triangle. B Select the second corner.	Result.
Choose Triangle.

First point of solid: Select the first point.

Second corner of triangle: Select the second corner of the triangle.

  Command List


Plan View Intersection Snap

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Snaps > Set Plan View Intersection Snap ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap > Plan View Intersection Snap

Keyboard: PLANVIEWINT

Alias: 2DINTERSECTION

Toggles the Plan View Intersection snap on or off. When set to ON, you can snap a new entity that you are drawing to the two-dimensional intersection of an existing entity.

A	The entity on the first plane.

B	The entity on the second plane.

C	The two-dimensional intersection of two entities (plan view).

  Command List


Workspaces

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Workspaces ( [image])

Menu: View > Workspaces

Keyboard: PMSPACE

Displays the Workspaces dialog box, from which you can create viewports and select the type of workspace in which you want to work. You may need to turn TILEMODE on or off before you can select a workspace. To do so, simply type in TILEMODE , then choose On or Off.

Dialog box control	Description

Create Viewport	Click to create a floating viewport in paper space.

Select Workspace	Select one of the three types of workspaces to create; Model or Paper Space with TILEMODE on or off.

When you switch from model space with floating viewports to model space with tiled viewports, your floating viewports seem to disappear. This is normal. Floating viewports do not display when you switch to this workspace. They are retained, however, and display normally when you switch back to model space with viewports.

  Command List


Prompt History
Prompt History Window

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: View > Prompt History Window

Keyboard: PMTHIST

Shortcut: F2

Alias: TEXTSCR

Displays the history of the most recent commands and prompts issued since you started the current session. This command is primarily used in scripts and menus.

  Command List


Point

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Point ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Draw Point

Keyboard: POINT

Alias: PO

Draws single point entities.

Settings · Multiple · <Location of point>: Select the location of the point, the default setting. To change the point settings, choose Settings. To draw multiple points, choose Multiple.

To change the point settings

Choose Settings.

The Drawing Settings dialog box is displayed with the Entity Creation tab active.

To draw multiple points

Choose Multiple.

Settings · <Location of point>: Select the location of the point. To change the point settings, choose Settings.

Settings · <Location of point>: Select the location of the next point. To change the point settings, choose Settings. You can continue to draw points by selecting the location of the next point. To stop drawing points, right-click the mouse.

  Command List


Polygon

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Polygon

Menu: Insert > Polygon

Keyboard: POLYGON

Alias: POL

Draws polygons with a specified number of sides. A polygon is created from a polyline entity. The default width of the polygon is specified with the PLINEWID system variable, but you can change the width when you draw a polygon.

Polygon: Multiple · Width of line · <Number of sides> <5>: To draw a polygon using the current setting for the number of sides, press Enter, or enter a new value. To draw multiple polygons, choose Multiple. To specify the width of the lines in the polygon, choose Width.

Specify by: Edge · <Center of polygon>: Select the center of the polygon. To specify the location of the first edge of the polygon, choose Edge.

To draw a polygon by specifying the center

A Select the center of the polygon. B Select the length between the center and a vertex point.	Result.
Choose Center.

Specify by: Side · <Select vertex point>: To draw a polygon by specifying the length between the center point and a vertex, select the vertex point. Selecting a vertex point also defines the rotation of the polygon. To draw a polygon by specifying the length between the center point and the side, choose Side.

To draw a polygon by specifying the length of the edge

A Select the first point of an edge on the polygon. B Select the end point of an edge on the polygon.	Result.
Choose Edge.

First endpoint of edge: Select the first point of the edge.

Second endpoint of edge: Select the end point of the edge.

To draw multiple polygons

Choose Multiple.

Polygon: Width of line · <Number of sides> <5>: To draw a polygon using the current setting for the number of sides, press Enter, or enter a new value. To specify the width of lines in the polygon, choose Width.

Specify by: Edge · <Center of  polygon>: To draw a polygon by specifying the length between the center point and a vertex, select the vertex point. To draw a polygon by specifying the length between two vertices, choose Edge.

Specify by: Side · <Select vertex point>: To draw a polygon by specifying the length between the center point and a vertex, select the vertex point. Selecting a vertex point also defines the rotation of the polygon. To draw a polygon by specifying the length between the center point and the side, choose Side.

Center of polygon: Select the center point of the next polygon. Continue to draw identical polygons by selecting the center point for each polygon. To end the command, press Enter.

To specify the width of lines

Choose Width.

Default polyline width <0.5000>: To accept the current setting for the line width, press Enter, or enter a new value.

Polygon: Multiple · Width of line · <Number of sides> <5>: To draw a polygon using the current setting for the number of sides, press Enter, or enter a new value. To draw multiple polygons, choose Multiple. To change the width of the lines in the polygon, choose Width.

  Command List


Polyline

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Polyline ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Polyline

Keyboard: POLYLINE

Alias: PL, PLINE

Draws two-dimensional polylines (connected line and arc segments) with optional width and taper.

Examples of different polyline types. A tapered polyline, a polyline with increased width and a closed polyline.

Start of polyline: Select the start point of the polyline.

Arc · Distance · Follow · Halfwidth · Width · <Next point>: Select the next point of the polyline. To draw an arc as a polyline segment, choose Arc. To specify the length of the next polyline segment, choose Distance. To continue the polyline in the direction of the last entity you drew, choose Follow. To specify the halfwidth of the following polyline segments, choose Halfwidth. To specify the width of the following polyline segments, choose Width.

Continue to draw polyline segments by selecting points or options in the command bar. To stop the command, press Enter.

If you previously drew an entity, the following prompt appears:

ENTER to use last point · Follow · <Start of polyline>: Select the start point of the polyline. To use the last point, press Enter. To continue the polyline in the direction of the last entity you drew, choose Follow.

Arc · Distance · Follow · Halfwidth · Width · <Next point>: Select the next point of the polyline. To draw an arc as a polyline segment, choose Arc. To specify the length of the next polyline segment, choose Distance. To continue the polyline in the direction of the last entity you drew, choose Follow. To specify the halfwidth of the following polyline segments, choose Halfwidth. To specify the width of the following polyline segments, choose Width.

Continue to draw polyline segments by selecting points or options in the command bar. To stop the command, press Enter.

TIP To draw a line-arc-line polyline, draw the first line segment. Choose Arc, and draw the arc starting from the end point of the line segment. Then choose Line, and draw the second line starting from the end point of the arc segment.

To draw an arc as a polyline segment

A	Select the first point of the polyline segment.

B	Select the second point, and from the prompt box, select Draw Arcs.

C	Select the end point of the arc.

Choose Arc.

Angle · CEnter · Direction · Halfwidth · Line · Radius · Secondpt · Width · <End of arc>: To draw an arc using the default method, select the end of the arc. To draw an arc by specifying its angle, choose Angle. To draw an arc by selecting its center point, choose CEnter. To draw an arc by specifying its direction, choose Direction. To specify the halfwidth of the arc, choose Halfwidth. To change to a line segment, choose Line. To draw an arc by specifying its radius, choose Radius. To draw an arc using the three-point method, choose Secondpt. To specify the width of the arc, choose Width.

To specify the angle of the arc

Choose Angle.

Included angle: Select a point or enter the angle.

Center · Radius · <End of arc>: Select the end point of the arc. To specify the center of the arc, choose Center. To specify the radius of the arc, choose Radius.

To draw an arc by selecting its center point

Choose Center.

Center point: Select the center point of the arc.

Angle · Length · <End of arc>: Select the end point of the arc. To specify the angle of the arc, choose Angle. To specify the length of the chord, choose Length.

To draw an arc by specifying its direction

Choose Direction.

Direction from start Move the pointer and click the mouse.

End of arc: To end the arc, select its end point.

To draw an arc by specifying its radius

Choose Radius.

Radius: Enter the radius of the arc, or select two points.

Angle · <End of arc>: To end the arc, select a point. To specify the angle of the arc, choose Angle.

To draw an arc using the three-point method

Choose Secondpt.

Second point: Select a second point of the arc.

End of arc: Select the end point of the arc.

To specify the halfwidth or width of the arc

Choose Halfwidth or Width.

Starting half-width[width] <0.0000>: Enter the starting halfwidth or width, or select two points.

Ending half-width[width] <0.5.000>: Enter the ending halfwidth or width, or select two points.

To specify the halfwidth or width of the polyline segment

A	Halfwidth of the polyline segment.

B	Width of the polyline segment.

Choose Halfwidth or Width.

Starting half-width[width] <0.0000>: Enter the starting halfwidth or width, or select two points.

Ending half-width[width] <0.5.000>: Enter the ending halfwidth or width, or select two points.

TIP To taper the polyline segment, select different start and end widths.

To specify the length of the polyline segment

Choose Length.

Length of line: Enter the length of the polyline segment, or select two points.

  Command List


Print Preview

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Print Preview ( [image])

Menu: File > Print Preview

Keyboard: PPREVIEW

Alias: PRE, PREVIEW, MAKEPREVIEW

Displays the Print dialog box so you can preview the current drawing before you print it.

  Command List


Print

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Print

Menu: File > Print

Keyboard: PRINT

Shortcut: Ctrl+P

Alias: PLOT

Displays the Print Settings dialog box so you can print the current drawing. You can print or plot your drawing on any Microsoft Windows-compatible printer or plotter. You can determine which portion of the drawing to print using the printing tools. The printed drawing includes what is visible on the screen and within the print area you specify. You can print or plot the entire drawing or a selected portion. You can specify the print area in several different ways, depending on the selections you make here. If you have trouble plotting, the Plotting Troubleshooter assists you in setting up for plotting.

You can control the position of the drawing on the paper by specifying the origin of the print area, the location of the lower left corner of the plot area, in relation to the lower left corner of the paper. The origin is normally set to 0,0, which places the lower left corner of the print area as close to the lower left corner of the paper as the printer or plotter can print. You can specify a different origin, however, by specifying different coordinates.

When you create a drawing, you generally draw entities full size. When you plot the drawing, you can either specify the scale of the resulting print or have the program automatically adjust the size of the drawing to fit the paper. To plot the drawing at a specific scale, specify the scale as a ratio of drawing units to printed units.

You can also include a date and time stamp, your name and company name, or other header and footer information at the top or bottom of the print. Use the Print Preview tool to see what the print will look like before you print it.

Dialog box control	Description

Entities to Print	Click to print all the entities within a specified print area. To print selected entities only, you must first select entities that you want to print.

Print Area	Click to select the area of the drawing that you want to print.

Windowed Print Area	If you selected Window as the Print Area, type the x- an y-coordinates of the rectangular area of the drawing that you want to print. You can also click Select Print Area, and then specify an area in the drawing that you want to print.

Print Only Area Within Specified Window	Select to print only the entities within the window you specify.

Map All Colors To Black	Select to print all entities in black, rather than in the colors displayed on the screen.

Printed Line Weight	Type or select the width of all printed lines.

Origin of Print Area	Type the x- and y-coordinates of the origin of the print area. You can also click Select Origin to specify the origin of the print area by specifying a point in the drawing.

Fit Print Area to Size of Page	Select to have the program automatically fit the specified print area to the current paper size.

User Defined Scale	Specify the scale for the printed drawing by typing the ratio or drawing units to printed inches.

Paper Size	Click to specify drawing units and paper size in millimeters or inches.

Header and Footer	Type or select the content for the header and footer that you want to appear at the top and bottom of the printed drawing.

Print Setup	Click to display the Print Setup dialog box.

Preview	Click to see how the drawing will appear before you print it.

  Command List


To print to a file

On Windows NT

If you are using Windows NT on a network, you must take these steps on the server where the print driver resides. Contact your system administrator for more information.

1.	From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Printers.

The Printers window lists all the printers that are set up for your machine.

2.	Select the printer whose print driver you want to use when printing to a file.

This selection is important, because even though you will not be printing to this printer, you will be using its print driver. The print driver determines things like fonts and available page sizes, so choose one that is appropriate for what you are printing.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Choose File > Properties.

•	Right-click the printer and choose Properties.

•	Double-click the printer name and choose Printer > Properties.

4.	Click the Ports tab.

5.	Turn off the current printer port (such as LPT 1) by clicking the check box to the left of the port name to uncheck it.

6.	From the list of ports, select FILE and then choose OK.

The next time you print to this printer, you will be prompted for a file name.

7.	Specify the file name and the location.

The active drawing prints the file you specify using the selected print driver.

On Windows 95

1.	From the Windows Start menu, choose Settings > Printers.

The Printers window lists all the printers that are set up for your machine.

2.	Select the printer whose print driver you want to use.

This selection is important, because even though you will not be printing to this printer, you will be using its print driver. The print driver determines things like fonts and available page sizes, so choose one that is appropriate for what you are printing.

3.	Do one of the following:

•	Choose File > Properties.

•	Right-click the printer and choose Properties.

•	Double-click the printer name and choose Printer > Properties.

4.	Click the Details tab.

5.	From the Print To The Following Port list, select FILE and choose OK.

The next time you print to this printer you will be prompted for a file name.

7.	Specify the file name and the location.

 The active drawing prints the file you specify using the selected print driver.

  Overview


Print Setup

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: File > Print Setup

Keyboard: PSETUP

Displays the Print Setup dialog box so you can set the options for printing the current drawing.

  Command List


Paper Space

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: PSPACE

Alias: PS

Switches the drawing environment to paper space so you can create your final layout and print or plot drawings. You define the different views of your model for your final layout by creating floating viewports in paper space. Floating viewports are different from tiled viewports. You can still edit your model in floating viewports after you switch to paper space.

If you use the menu or status bar to select the Paper Space command, TILEMODE turns off automatically when you switch from model space to paper space. But before you can use PSPACE on the command bar, you must turn TILEMODE off (0).

  Command List


Purge

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: PURGE

Cleans the drawing file of unused drawing elements. With the Purge command, you can remove blocks, layers, linetypes, text styles, or dimension styles that you have defined but are not using in the drawing. Purging can significantly reduce the drawing file size.

Linetype definitions are purged only from the drawing; the definition in the icad.lin file is not purged.

If you have nested blocks in your drawing file, only one level of nesting is purged at a time. For example, say you create a block from a circle and insert two instances of this block into your drawing. Next, you create a block that consists of these two circle blocks, and you insert the new block into the drawing. If you delete the new block, you will still have an unused, nested block in the file. If you purge the file, the first block with the single circle remains in the file. You must use the Purge command again for as many times as there are levels of nested blocks. If one or more elements that you want to purge cannot be found in the file, a message is displayed listing those elements.

To purge a drawing file

Purge: baTch · All · Blocks · Dimstyles · LAyers · LTypes · STyles: To clean the drawing of all unused elements without having the opportunity to review and confirm your selection, choose Batch. To clean the drawing of all unused elements, choose All. To clean the drawing of unused blocks, choose Blocks. To clean the drawing of unused dimension styles, choose Dimstyles. To clean the drawing of unused layers, choose LAyers. To clean the drawing of unused linetypes, choose LTypes. To clean the drawing of unused text styles, choose STyles.

Purge [Selected Element]? (Yes/No/yes to All)? <No>: To skip the displayed element and continue to the next one, press Enter. To purge the element from the drawing, choose Yes. To skip the element and continue to the next, choose No. To purge all remaining elements, choose yes to All.

NOTE Choosing Batch purges all unused elements without asking you to confirm each element.

  Command List


Pyramid

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Pyramid ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Pyramid

Keyboard: PYRAMID

Alias: AI_PYRAMID

Draws a three-dimensional pyramid.

A	Select the first point on the base of the pyramid.

B	Select the second point on the base.

C	Select the third point on the base.

D	Select the fourth point on the base.

E	Select the apex of the pyramid.

First point for base of pyramid: Select a point to start the base.

Second point: Select the second point for the base of the pyramid.

Third point: Select the third point for the base of the pyramid.

Tetrahedron · <Last point for base>: Select the last point for the base of the pyramid. To draw a pyramid consisting of three base points, choose Tetrahedron.

Ridge · Top surface · <Apex of pyramid>: Select the apex of the pyramid. To create a ridge consisting of two points at the top of the pyramid, choose Ridge. To create a surface consisting of four points at the top of the pyramid, choose Top surface.

To draw a tetrahedron pyramid

A	Select the first point on the base of the tetrahedron.

B	Select the second point.

C	Select the third point.

D	Select the height of the tetrahedron.

Choose Tetrahedron.

Top surface · <Apex of tetrahedron>: Select the apex of the tetrahedron. To create a surface consisting of three points at the top of the pyramid, choose Top surface.

To create a ridge at the top of the pyramid

A	Select the first point on the base of the pyramid.

B	Select the second point.

C	Select the third point.

D	Select the fourth point.

E	Select Ridge, and then select the first point of the ridge at the top of the pyramid.

F	Select the second point at the top of the pyramid.

Choose Ridge.

Start of ridge: Select the first point at the top of the pyramid.

End of ridge: Select the second point.

To specify the top surface of the pyramid

A	Select the first point on the base of the pyramid.

B	Select the second point.

C	Select the third point.

D	Select the fourth point.

E	Select Top Surface, and then select the first point of the top of the pyramid.

F	Select the second point.

G	Select the third point.

H	Select the fourth point at the top of the pyramid.

Choose Top surface.

First point on top surface of pyramid: Select the first point at the top of the pyramid.

Second point: Select the second point.

Third point: Select the third point.

Last point on top surface of pyramid: Select the last point.

NOTE  If you are drawing a three-sided tetrahedron, you are prompted to select three points for the top surface.

  Command List


Quick Print

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Print ( [image])

Keyboard: QPRINT

Prints the active viewport. This command uses your default print setup information and does not give you the opportunity to specify a printer name or any other print-related information.

  Command List


Quick Save

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Save ( [image])

Menu: File > Save

Keyboard: QSAVE

Shortcut: Ctrl+S

Writes the active drawing to your hard disk. If you have not previously saved the drawing, the Save Drawing As dialog box appears so you can name the drawing before saving it.

  Command List


Quick Text

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: QTEXT

Alias: QT

Turns Quick Text on or off. When Quick Text is on, text is displayed as placeholder boxes, rather than characters or words. Use this command to speed processing when working with drawings that contain a lot of text.

An example of a drawing with quick text set to off or on.

  Command List


Quadrant Snap

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Snaps > Set Quadrant Snap ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap > Quadrant Snap

Keyboard: QUADRANT

Toggles the Quadrant snap on or off. When on, you can snap entities to quadrant points of arcs, circles, ellipses, or elliptical arcs. When you snap a line to a quadrant point on an ellipse, you can snap only to the left or right axis points.

A	Snap a line you are drawing to a quadrant point on a circle (in this case, the right quadrant).

  Command List


Quick Snap

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: QUICK

Toggles the Quick snap on or off. When on, you can snap entities to the first snap point found that matches the active Entity Snaps . All entity snaps look for entities to snap to within the box placed around the crosshairs of your cursor. Before using QUICK, you must first choose an Entity Snap.

  Command List


Ray

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Ray ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Ray

Keyboard: RAY

Draws an infinite line in one direction from or through a specified point.

A	Select the start point of the ray.

B	Select the direction of the ray.

Infinite ray: Bisect · Horizontal · Vertical · Angle · Parallel · <Start of ray>: To draw a ray using a point and direction, specify the starting point of the ray. To draw a ray that bisects a point or entity, choose Bisect. To draw a ray in a horizontal direction, choose Horizontal. To draw a ray in a vertical direction, choose Vertical. To specify the angle of the ray, choose Angle. To draw a ray parallel to another entity, choose Parallel.

Direction: Specify the direction in which you want to draw the ray.

Direction: Specify the direction in which you want to draw another ray. The second ray is drawn from the same starting point as the first ray. You can continue to draw rays by specifying directions. To stop drawing rays, right-click the mouse or press Esc.

To draw a ray that bisects a point or entity

A	Specify the point to bisect.

B	Specify the start of the bisect angle.

C	Specify the end of the bisect angle.

Choose Bisect.

Entity · <Vertex point>: Specify a vertex point for the ray to bisect. To select an entity to bisect, choose Entity.

Bisection angle start point: Specify the start of an angle.

Bisection angle end point: Specify the end of the angle.

To select an entity to bisect

Choose Entity.

Select line, arc, or polyline segment to bisect: Select the entity you want to bisect. You can only bisect lines, arcs, or polylines.

Select side for ray bisection: Select the side from which you want the ray to project. The ray is created perpendicular to the entity. You can continue selecting entities to bisect.

To draw a horizontal ray

A	Specify the start point of the ray.

Choose Horizontal.

Location: Specify the starting point (left side) of a horizontal ray.

Location: Specify the starting point of a second horizontal ray. You can continue to draw horizontal rays by selecting starting points. To stop drawing rays, right-click the mouse or press Esc.

To draw a vertical ray

A	Specify the start point of the ray.

Choose Vertical.

Location: Specify the starting point (bottom) of a vertical ray.

Location: Specify the starting point of a second vertical ray. You can continue to draw vertical rays by selecting starting points. To stop drawing rays, right-click the mouse or press Esc.

To draw a ray by specifying its angle

A	Specify the start point of the ray and an angle.

Choose Angle.

Reference · <Enter angle (45°)>: To accept the default setting for the angle, press Enter, or enter a new value. To specify an entity to use as a reference point, choose Reference.

Location: Specify the starting point of a ray.

Location: Specify the starting point of a second ray. You can continue to draw rays by selecting starting points. To stop drawing rays, right-click the mouse or press Esc.

To draw a ray using an entity as the reference point for the angle

A	Select the reference entity.

B	Select the start point of the ray and specify the angle.

Choose Reference.

Select reference entity: Select the entity you want to use as a reference point for the angle.

Enter angle: Enter an angle at which to draw the ray, measured from the reference point in the direction defined on the Drawing Units tab of the Drawing Settings dialog box.

To draw a ray that parallels an entity

A	Select the entity you want to parallel.

B	Select the side for the ray.

Choose Parallel.

Through point · <Distance for parallel infinite line> (2.5000): To accept the default setting, press Enter. To specify a point from which you want the ray to project into infinity, choose Through point. To specify the distance from an entity that you want the ray drawn, enter a value.

Select entity for parallel infinite line: Select the entity that you want the ray to parallel.

Side for parallel infinite line: Select the side of the entity where you want to draw the ray.

To select the through point

Choose Through point.

Select entity for parallel infinite line: Select the entity that you want the ray to parallel.

Through the point: Select the point from which you want the ray to project into infinity.

  Command List


Reassociate Entity Data

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Data > Reassociate Entity Data ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Entity Data > Reassociate Entity Data

Keyboard: REASSOCAPP

Associates programs with entity data. Data is associated with entities by programs written to run with IntelliCAD.

  Command List


Record Script

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Tools > Record Script ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Record Script

Keyboard: RECSCRIPT

Displays the Record Script dialog box so you can begin creating a macro. Specify a location, and enter a file name for the script file. To add to an existing script file, select the script file and select the check box to Append to Script. Recording begins when you enter commands for your macro. To end the macro and write the script file, choose Tools > Stop Recording. To play the script file, choose Tools > Run Script, and select the file to play.

CAUTION The script recorder does not record your use of toolbars, menus, or dialog boxes. Using these while recording a script causes unpredictable results.

  Command List


Rectangle

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Rectangle ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Rectangle

Keyboard: RECTANGLE

Alias: REC, RECT, RECTANG

Draws a rectangle. A rectangle is a polyline entity.

A Select the first corner of the rectangle. B Select the opposite corner of the rectangle.	Result.
Chamfer · Elevation · Fillet · Rotated · Square · Thickness · Width · <Select first corner of rectangle>: To begin drawing a rectangle using the default method, select a point for the first corner. To specify the angle of the rectangle, choose Rotated. To draw a square rectangle (all sides are equal), choose Square. To specify the width of the line, choose Width of line.

Other corner of rectangle: Select the opposite corner of the rectangle.

To draw a rectangle with chamfered corners

A	Specify the first chamfer distance.

B	Specify the second chamfer distance.

Choose Chamfer.

Defaults · First chamfer distance to use for all rectangles: Enter the first chamfer distance, or select the first point to specify the distance. To use the default setting in the Drawing Settings dialog box, choose Defaults.

Second point: Select the second point for the chamfer distance.

Second chamfer distance to use for all rectangles <0.5>: To specify the distance, enter the second chamfer distance, or select the first point.

Second point: Select the second point for the chamfer distance.

Chamfer · Elevation · Fillet · Rotated · Square · Thickness · Width · <Select first corner of rectangle>: To begin drawing a rectangle using the default method, select a point for the first corner. To specify the angle of the rectangle, choose Rotated. To draw a square rectangle (all sides are equal), choose Square. To specify the width of the line, choose Width of line.

NOTE The distance you specify for the first chamfer distance is saved in the CHAMFERA system variable. The distance you specify for the second chamfer distance is saved in the CHAMFERB system variable. To draw rectangles without chamfered corners, change the values for these variables to zero.

To specify the elevation of the rectangle

Elevation to use for all rectangles: Enter the elevation.

Chamfer · Elevation · Fillet · Rotated · Square · Thickness · Width · <Select first corner of rectangle>: To begin drawing a rectangle using the default method, select a point for the first corner. To specify the angle of the rectangle, choose Rotated. To draw a square rectangle (all sides are equal), choose Square. To specify the width of the line, choose Width of line.

To draw a rectangle with filleted corners

A	Specify the fillet distance.

Choose Fillet.

Fillet distance to use for all rectangles: Enter the fillet distance.

Chamfer · Elevation · Fillet · Rotated · Square · Thickness · Width · <Select first corner of rectangle>: To begin drawing a rectangle using the default method, select a point for the first corner. To specify the angle of the rectangle, choose Rotated. To draw a square rectangle (all sides are equal), choose Square. To specify the width of the line, choose Width of line.

NOTE The distance you specify for the fillet distance is used for all subsequent rectangles you draw. To change the fillet distance, choose Fillet again and enter a new value.

To specify the angle of the rectangle

Choose Rotated.

Width of line · <Select first corner of rectangle>: To draw a rectangle using the default method, select a point for the first corner. To specify the width of the line, choose Width of line.

Other corner of rectangle: Select the opposite corner of the rectangle.

Rotation angle for solid <value>:

To draw a square

A Select the first corner of the square. B Select the second corner of the square. You can specify the rotation of the square as you select the second corner.	Result.
Choose Square.

Width of line · <Select first corner of rectangle>: To draw a square using the default method, select a point for the first corner. To specify the width of the line, choose Width of line.

Second corner of square: Select the opposite corner of the square.

To specify the width of lines

Choose Width.

Default polyline width <0.5000>: To accept the current setting for the line width, press Enter, or enter a new value.

Angle · Square · Width of line · <Select first corner of rectangle>: To draw a rectangle using the default method, select a point for the first corner. To specify the angle of the rectangle, choose Angle. To draw a square rectangle (all sides are equal), choose Square. To change the width of the line, choose Width of line.

Other corner of rectangle: Select the opposite corner of the rectangle.

NOTE The width of the line you specify is used for all subsequent rectangles you draw. To change the line width, choose Width of line again and enter a new value.

  Command List


Redefine

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: REDEFINE

Restores a built-in command deleted by UNDEFINE. If a command name is undefined, you can activate the command by typing a period before the name.

  Command List


Redo

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Redo ( [image])

Menu: Edit > Redo

Keyboard: REDO

Shortcut: Ctrl+Y

Reverses an UNDO command. You must use the UNDO command before you can use the REDO command.

  Command List


Redraw

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Redraw ( [image])

Menu: View > Redraw

Keyboard: REDRAW

Alias: R

Updates the display, eliminating any leftover markers or ghost pixels from edited entities that may be visible on the screen.

Before	After
  Command List


Redraw All

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Redraw All ( [image])

Keyboard: REDRAWALL

Alias: RA

Updates all viewports and removes markers or blips (ghosting) from edited entities that may be visible on the screen.

Before	After
  Command List


Regenerate

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Regen ( [image])

Menu: View > Regen

Keyboard: REGEN

Alias: RE

Regenerates, or reproduces, the current viewports, and recalculates the screen location of all entities.

Before	After
  Command List


Regenerate All

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Regen All ( [image])

Keyboard: REGENALL

Alias: REA

Regenerates, or reproduces, the current viewports, and recalculates the screen location of all entities.

Before	After
  Command List


Regenerate Automatically

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: REGENAUTO

Regenerates the current viewport at intervals specified by the program when you set to ON.

ON · OFF · Toggle <On>: To retain the current setting, the default selection, press Enter. To turn automatic regeneration on, choose ON. To turn automatic regeneration off, choose OFF.

TIP To save time when you are working in a large drawing, turn REGENAUTO off.

  Command List


Rename

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: RENAME

Alias: -REN

Changes the names associated with text styles, layers, linetypes, blocks, views, user coordinate systems, viewport configurations, and dimension styles.

Rename: Block · Dimstyle · LAyer· LType· Style · Ucs · VIew: To rename a block, choose Block. To rename a dimension style, choose Dimstyle. To rename a layer, choose LAyer. To rename a linetype, choose LType. To rename a text style, choose Style. To rename a UCS, choose Ucs. To rename a defined view, choose VIew.

[Item] to be renamed: Enter the name of the item you want to rename.

New name for the [Item][name]: Enter the new name of the item.

TIP You can rename these elements from within the Drawing Explorer.

  Command List


Render

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Rendering > Render ( [image])

Menu: View > Rendering > Render

Keyboard: RENDER

Alias: RR

Shades the surface of a model as though it were illuminated from multiple light sources, providing a quick way to realistically visualize your image.

An example of render on multiple entities.

The Render command creates a more realistic image than the Shade command, because the use of light sources gives the image depth. However, Render creates an image that is less realistic than the Full Render command, because Full Render also calculates shadows and reflections; uses surface materials to calculate reflection, refraction, and transparency; and uses a background image.

Rendering automatically creates a base on which your model is displayed, if you don't already have one, so it does not appear suspended in space.

You can export rendered images using the Render Settings command.

TIP The smaller your viewport, the faster the image will render.

  Command List


Resume

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: RESUME

Used when writing scripts, the Resume command continues the script if it is interrupted. To interrupt a script, press either Esc or Backspace.

TIP If an error is encountered during a script, use RESUME to continue the script.

  Command List


Revolved Surface

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Revolved Surface ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Revolved Surface

Keyboard: REVSURF

Creates a three-dimensional polygon mesh that approximates a surface of revolution by rotating a curve around an axis. The curve sweeps around the selected axis to define the surface in the N direction of the mesh. To close the mesh in the N direction, select a circle or closed polyline as the curve.

If you select a polyline, the vector from the first vertex to the last determines the rotation axis. All other vertices are ignored. The M direction of the mesh is determined by the axis of revolution.

A Select the entity to revolve. B Select the axis around which the entity revolves.	Result.
Select a linear entity to revolve: Select a line, arc, circle, or polyline.

Select the axis of revolution: Select a line or open polyline.

Angle to begin surface of revolution <0º>: To accept the current setting, press Enter, or enter a new value. When you specify an angle, the surface of revolution begins at an offset from the generated curve path.

Degrees to revolve entity (+ for ccw, - for cw) <360>: To accept the current setting, press Enter, or enter a new value. To prevent the circle from closing, enter a value of less than 360°.

  Command List


Rotate

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Rotate ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Rotate

Keyboard: ROTATE

Alias: RO

Rotates existing entities around a specified point.

A	Select the entity you want to rotate.

B	Select the rotation point.

C	Select the angle of rotation.

Select entities to rotate: Select the entity you want to rotate.

Rotation point: Select the point around which you want the entity rotated.

Base angle · <Rotation angle>: Enter the angle of rotation, the default setting. To specify the base angle, choose Base angle.

To specify the base angle

Choose Base angle.

Base angle <0>: Enter the base angle of the entity.

New angle: Enter the new angle of the entity.

  Command List


Rotate 3D

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > 3D Rotate ( [image])

Menu: Modify > 3D Rotate

Keyboard: ROTATE3D

Rotates entities around a three-dimensional axis. The rotation angle is the difference between the starting and ending angles.

A Select the entity you want to rotate. B Select the first point of rotation axis. C Select the second point of rotation axis. D Enter the angle of rotation.	Result.
Select entities to rotate: Select the entity you want to rotate.

Rotation point: Select the point around which you want the entity rotated.

Base angle · <Rotation angle>: Enter the angle of rotation, the default setting. To specify the base angle, choose Base angle.

  Command List


Restart Script

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: RSCRIPT

Restarts a script from the beginning. This command is useful for demonstrations, when the same script must run repeatedly. You can run the same script continuously. To end the command, press Esc.

TIP Turn off any log file that is on; otherwise, it continues to grow when the Restart Script command is active.

  Command List


Ruled Surface

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Ruled Surface ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Ruled Surface

Keyboard: RULESURF

Creates a three-dimensional polygon mesh that approximates a ruled surface between two curves. You can select a line, arc, circle, point, or polyline. You can use a point for only one of the ends of the mesh. The end point of each curve nearest the point at which you selected it is the 0,0 vertex.

A Select the first entity. B Select the second entity.	Result.
Select entity to define first end of ruled surface: Select the first entity.

Select entity to define other end: Select the second entity. If the first entity is an open entity (such as an arc or line), the second entity must also be an open entity. If the first entity is a closed entity, the second entity must also be a closed entity.

TIP To create a polygon mesh, select each entity at the same end. To create a self-intersecting polygon mesh, select each entity at opposite ends.

  Command List


Save

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Save ( [image])

Menu: File > Save

Keyboard: SAVE

Shortcut: Ctrl+S

Alias: SA

Displays the Save Drawing As dialog box so you can save the current drawing. You can save the drawing with the existing name, or you can rename it and save it with a different name.

  Command List


Save All

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: SAVEALL

Saves all open drawings. If you have not previously saved a drawing, the Save Drawing As dialog box is displayed.

  Command List


Save As

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: File > Save As

Keyboard: SAVEAS

Displays the Save Drawing As dialog box so you can save the current drawing. You can save it with the existing name, or you can rename it and save it with a different name.

  Command List


Scale

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Scale ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Scale

Keyboard: SCALE

Alias: SC

Changes the scale of existing entities, either enlarging them or reducing them proportionately in x, y, and z directions. A scale factor greater than 1 enlarges the entities; a scale factor between 0 and 1 reduces them.

A Select the entity you want to scale. B Select the base point.	Result.
Select entities to scale: Select the entities you want to scale.

Base point: Select the base point of the entities.

Base scale · <Scale factor>: Enter the scale factor, the default setting. To increase the size of the entity, enter a scale factor greater than 1. To decrease the size of the entity, enter a scale factor less than 1. To specify the base scale, choose Base scale.

To specify the base scale

Choose Base scale.

Base scale <1>: Enter the base scale of the entities.

New scale: Enter the new scale of the entities.

  Command List


Run Script

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Tools > Run Script ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Run Script

Keyboard: SCRIPT

Alias: SCR

Displays the Run Script dialog box so you can carry out a command script.

  Command List


Select

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: SELECT

Groups entities into a selection set for use in subsequent commands.

Select entities to include in set: Select the entities you want to include in the selection set. You can use any of the selection methods. After you select the entities you want, press Enter.

TIP Entities that you preselect are placed into a previous selection set. When you perform many IntelliCAD commands (such as Delete or Change), you can choose Previous Selection Set.

  Command List


Select All

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Edit > Select All

Keyboard: SELGRIPS

Shortcut: Ctrl+A

Alias: SELGRIP

Displays the grips of all entities in a drawing.

  Command List


Select Color

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Select Color ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Colors > Select Color

Keyboard: SETCOLOR

Alias: COL, DDCOLOR, DDCOLOUR

Displays the Color dialog box so you can change the color in which subsequent entities are drawn.

  Command List


Dimension Settings

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Dimension Settings ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Dimension Settings

Keyboard: SETDIM

Alias: D, DDIM

Displays the Dimension Settings dialog box so you can create and modify dimension styles. Dimension styles are dimension settings that you have defined and saved. When you create dimension styles, you can control the layout and appearance of any dimension.

Dialog box element	Description

Dimension Style:	Select the name of dimension style. Changes you make to the dimension variables represented by this dialog box are reflected in the named style.

Save:	Select to save the changes made to the dimension variables to the style name.

New:	Displays the New Dimension Style dialog box in which you can create and name a new dimension style.

Rename:	Displays the Rename Dimension Style dialog box so you can change the name of an existing dimension style.

Delete:	Displays the Delete Dimension Style dialog box so you can delete an existing dimension style.

Reset all values to default:	Select to change all dimension variables to their default state. The program does not warn you that your changes will be lost.

Setting the style of arrowheads and tick marks

On this dialog box, you can set the style of arrowheads and tick marks. Setting the style of arrowheads

Dialog box element	Description

User-defined arrowheads:	Click the check box to select the start and end arrowheads from the lists. Click to uncheck the box to use the default arrowheads (filled).

Start:	Select the starting arrowhead from the list. This arrowhead is drawn at the first point you specify for the dimension line.

End:	Select the ending arrowhead from the list. This arrowhead is drawn at the second point you specify for the dimension line.

Arrow size:	Specify the length of the arrowhead, in units. The default is 0.18 units.

Setting the style of tick marks

Dialog box element	Description

Enable tick marks:	Click the check box to display arrowheads as tick marks.

Tick mark size:	Specify the length of the tick mark. The default is 1.0 units. The length is measured in the horizontal or vertical distance, not the length of the tick line.

Setting the style of fitting text between extension lines

On this dialog box, you can specify how dimension text is placed when there is no room between the extension lines.

Dialog box element	Description

Fit text and arrowheads inside:	Always force text and arrowheads between the extension lines.

Fit text inside, arrows outside:	Force text between the extension lines, but move arrowheads outside when necessary.

Fit either text or arrowheads inside:	Keep either text or arrowheads inside, whichever fits better.

Fit best way possible:	The default.

Draw leader if necessary:	When text is forced outside the extension lines, a leader is drawn from the dimension line to the text.

Allow text anywhere w/o leader:	When text is outside the extension lines, no leader is drawn.

Distance around dimension text:	Leave specified amount of space between text and dimension lines or other elements. The default is 0.09 units.

Setting the style of dimension, extension, center mark, and leader lines

On this dialog box, you specify how you what lines placed, what color you want the lines to be, and the dimension line format.

Dialog box element	Description

Center mark size:	Specify the size of the center mark. The default is 0.09 units. A value of 0 draws no center mark. A negative value, such as -0.09,  draws a center mark with extension lines.

Baseline offset:	Specify the distance to offset successive dimension lines when creating baseline dimensions. The default is 0.38 units.

Offset from origin:	Specify the distance between the extension origin and the extension line. The default is 0.0625 units.

Extend past obliques:	Specify the distance the dimension line extends past the extension line when the arrowhead is a tick mark. The default is 0 units.

Extend past dimension:	Specify the distance the extension lines extend past the dimension line. The default is 0.18 units.

Dimension lines:	Select a color for the dimension lines. Click Select Color to display the Color dialog box.

Extension lines:	Select a color for the extension lines. Click Select Color to display the Color dialog box..

To set the dimension line format:

Dialog box element	Description

Disable dimension line:	To disable the first dimension line, select First. To disable the second dimension line, select Second.

Disable extension line:	To disable the first extension line, select First. To disable the second extension line, select Second.

Suppress outside dimension lines:	Select to prevent the dimension line from being drawn outside of extension lines, click the check box to select it.

Enable lines between extension lines, text outside:	To draw dimensions with a full dimension line between the extension lines and text outside, click the check box to select it.

Setting the style of dimension text

On this dialog box, you specify text style, height, color, alignment options, and other text characteristics.

Dialog box element	Description

Text style:	Select the name of a text style, which controls the look of the dimension text. The default is Standard.

Explorer:	Click to display the Drawing Explorer, which allows you to create new text styles or copy a text style from another drawing.

Text height:	Specify the height of the text. The default is 0.1800 units.

Select Color:	Click to display the Colors dialog box. Select a color for the dimension text.

Prefix:	Specify a prefix for the dimension text. This prefix is applied to all dimension text, but you can override it..

Suffix:	Specify a suffix for the dimension text. This suffix is applied to all dimension text, but you can override it.

To set text alignment options:

Dialog box element	Description

Align inside text with dimension line:	When a dimension is not horizontal, click the check box to select it  to force dimension text (located between the extension lines) to align with the dimension line. The default is checked.

Align outside text with dimension line:	When a dimension is not horizontal, click the check box to select it to force dimension text (located outside the extension lines) to align with the dimension line. The default is checked.

Force text between extension lines:	Click the check box to select it to forces text to be placed between the extension lines. Arrowheads and dimension lines are placed outside, if there isn't sufficient room. The default is unchecked.

Vertical text offset:	Dimension text is normally centered on the dimension line. Change this setting to a positive value to move dimension text above the dimension line; set a negative value to move text below the dimension line. The default value is 0.

Horizontal:	Specify the horizontal justification of dimension text.

Vertical:	Specify the vertical justification of dimension text.

Setting the style of tolerance text

Choose Tolerance to specify the tolerance text, which typically consists of a +/-0.1 suffix to the dimension text.

Dialog box element	Description

Generate dimensional limits:	Select to insert dimension text as an upper and lower tolerance limit. Default is off.

Append dimension tolerance:	Select to insert dimension text along with an upper and lower tolerance limit. Default is off.

Tolerance limits:	Select values for the lower and upper tolerance limits. Both numbers can be positive, negative, zero, or any combination. Default values are 0.0000 for both.

Specify the tolerance text

Dialog box element	Description

Decimal places for tolerance:	Specify the number of decimal places for the tolerance text. Maximum is 8 decimal places; minimum is 0; default is 4.

Scale factor for tolerance text:	Specify whether the tolerance text is larger or smaller than the dimension text. A number smaller than 1.0 inserts the tolerance text smaller than the dimension text; default is 1.0 (tolerance text is the same size as dimension text).

Vertical text alignment:	Specify the vertical alignment of the tolerance text relative to the dimension text. The default is middle.

Suppress leading zeros:	Select to prevent zeros in front of the decimal point for tolerance text less than 1.0. Example: .2540. Default is off, such as 0.2450.

Suppress trailing zeros:	Select to prevent zeros after the last non-zero digit behind the decimal point for tolerance text. Example: 0.254. Default is off, such as 0.2450.

Click the Text tab.

Setting the style of dimension units

On this dialog box, you specify scaling and dimensioning.

Dialog box element	Description

Decimal places:	Specify the number of decimal places for the dimension text. The maximum is 8 decimal places; the minimum is 0; the default is 4.

Round linear distance to:	Default is 0.0000.

Suppress leading zeros:	Select to prevent zeros in front of the decimal point for dimension text less than 1.0. For example: .2540. The default is off, such as 0.2450.

Suppress trailing zeros:	Select to prevent zeros after the last nonzero digit behind the decimal point for dimension text. For example: 0.254. The default is off, such as 0.2450.

Specify the Scaling:

Dialog box element	Description

Comprehensive scale factor:	Enlarges or reduces the overall size of all dimension settings. For example, a scale factor of 2.0 doubles the size of text, arrowheads, gaps, etc. The default is 1.0.

Linear dimensioning scale factor:	Multiplies dimension text by this scale factor. For example, a linear scale factor of 2.54 converts imperial inches to metric centimeters. The default is 1.0.

Specify the Dimension Format:

Dialog box element	Description

Linear:	Select a format for dimension text. The default is Decimal.

Angular:	Select a format for dimension angles. The default is Decimal degrees.

Setting the style of alternate dimension units

Choose Alternate Units

Setting the style for Alternate Units Settings

Dialog box element	Description

Enable alternate units:	Select to display two sets of dimension text with each dimension. For example, imperial and metric units. Default is off.

Suppress leading zeros:	Select to prevent zeros in front of the decimal point for alternate text less than 1.0. Example: .2540. Default is off, such as 0.2450.

Suppress trailing zeros:	Select to prevent zeros after the last non-zero digit behind the decimal point for alternate text. Example: 0.254. Default is off, such as 0.2450.

Decimal places:	Specify the number of decimal places for the alternative text. Maximum is 8 decimal places; minimum is 0; default is 2.

Scale factor:	Multiplies dimension text by this scale factor to create the alternative text. For example, a scale factor of 2.54 allows the program to place imperial inches and metric centimeters. Default is 25.4.

Format for text:	Select a format for dimension text. Default is Decimal.

Prefix:	Specify a prefix for the alternative text. This prefix is applied to all alternative text but can be overridden.

Suffix:	Specify a suffix for the alternative text. This suffix is applied to all alternative text but can be overridden.

Setting the style for Alternate Unit Tolerances

Dialog box element	Description

Decimal places for tolerances:	Specify the number of decimal places for the alternative tolerance text. Maximum is 8 decimal places; minimum is 0; default is 2.

Suppress leading zeros:	Select to prevent zeros in front of the decimal point for alternate tolerance text less than 1.0. Example: .2540. Default is off, such as 0.2450.

Suppress trailing zeros:	Specify the number of decimal places for the alternative tolerance text. Maximum is 8 decimal places; minimum is 0; default is 2.

  Command List


Entity Snap Settings

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Entity Snap Settings ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap > Entity Snap Settings

Keyboard: SETESNAP

Alias: OS, DDESNAP, DDOSNAP

Displays the Drawing Settings dialog box with the Coordinate Input tab active so you can change the Entity Snaps settings.

  Command List


Set Layer by Entity

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Set Layer by Entity ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Set Layer by Entity

Keyboard: SETLAYER

Sets a new layer as the current layer.

Select entity to set the current layer: Select an entity in the layer that you want to make the current layer.

TIP The current layer name is displayed in the status bar. To display the Drawing Explorer, double-click the name.

  Command List


Drawing Settings

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Drawing Settings ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Drawing Settings

Keyboard: SETTINGS

Alias: GR, RM, SE, UN, DDGRIPS, DDOSNAP, DDPTYPE, DDUNITS, DDEMODES, DDRMODES, DDSELECT

Displays the Drawing Settings dialog box so you can set or change global default settings, such as drawing units, coordinate input, display, entity creation, entity modification, and three-dimensional settings. The last tab you select in the Drawing Settings dialog box becomes the default tab the next time you use the command.

For more information, click the name of the tab.

Drawing Units

Coordinate Input

Display

Entity Creation

Entity Modification

3D Settings

  Command List


Drawing Units

  How To	  Related Topics

The Drawing Units tab of the Drawing Settings dialog box controls all unit-related defaults for IntelliCAD. Use this tab to change such defaults as unit types, angle direction, angle base, and display precision. From the Change Settings For list, choose Linear Units, Angular Units, or User Coordinate System to set Drawing Units defaults.

Dialog box element	Description

Remove spaces when converting distances or angles to text:	Click the check box to display distances and angles with hyphens instead of spaces. Doing this does not affect how distances or angles are entered; you cannot use spaces when entering distances or angles.

Linear Units

Unit Types:	Select the way you want linear measurements to display.

Scientific	Exponential notation.

Decimal 	Decimal units (use for Metric).

Engineering	Feet and decimal inches.

Architectural	Feet and fractional inches.

Fractional	Fractional inches (no feet).

Display Precision:	Select the accuracy to which you want linear measurements displayed, which defines the number of decimal places shown for all units except Fractional. The default value is 4 decimal places (or 1/16 in fractional units); the maximum is 8 decimal places (or 1/256 in fractional units); the minimum is 0, which displays linear measurements as integers.

Angular Units

Unit Types:	Select the way you want angular measurements to display.

Display Precision:	Select the accuracy to which you want angular measurements displayed. The default value is 0 decimal places; the maximum is 8 decimal places for decimal degrees.

Angle Direction:	Select whether you want angles measured clockwise or counterclockwise (the default) from the Angle Base.

Angle Base:	Select the degree from which you want angles measured. The default setting is zero degrees, which points East and is the most commonly used direction. Some drawings require that zero degrees points North.

User Coordinate System

UCS Icon:	Select whether you want the UCS icon turned off, turned on (the default), or displayed at the origin (0,0,0). When you select On, the UCS icon is displayed in the lower-right corner of the window, no matter which part of the drawing you are viewing.

Show Plan View When Changing UCS:	Click the check box to select it to display the plan view before going to the new UCS.


Coordinate Input

  How To	  Related Topics

The Coordinate Input tab of the Drawing Settings dialog box controls the way you enter information, such as how you snap to entities and the reference grid, the size of the entity selection pickbox and snap aperture, as well as the drawing limits. From the Change Settings For list, choose Snap And Grid, Entity Snaps, Entity Selection, or Limits to set Coordinate Input defaults.

Dialog box element	Description

Draw Orthogonal:	Select to constrain your ability to draw to right angles and horizontal and vertical lines only (the default is off). You can toggle orthogonal mode on or off at any time by pressing F8.

Snap and Grid

Snap Settings:	Select to restrict cursor movement to specified increments (the default is off). Specify the x and y spacing; the default is 0.5 units. You can turn the snap on or off at any time by pressing F9.

Reference Grid:	Select to display the reference grid (the default is off). Specify the x and y spacing for the grid; the default is 0.5 units. If the spacing is set to 0, grid spacing becomes the same as snap spacing. You can turn the reference grid on or off at any time by pressing F7.

NOTE The grid is an array of dots used as an aid in drawing. Turning the grid on does not affect drawing output, because the grid is not plotted. The extent of the grid display is constrained by the Drawing Limits.

Snap And Grid Settings:	Select Sync Grid To Snap to set the reference grid spacing equal to the current snap setting. This option is only available if you have both Snap and Show Grid turned on. To change the origin of the snap and grid, enter values for the x and y location. To change the angle of the snap and grid, select an angle of rotation (the default is 0 degrees).

NOTE It is common to display the grid at a multiple of the snap setting. For example, you can set the snap spacing to 0.1 units and the grid spacing to 1 unit.

NOTE The snap origin and rotation angle affect the placement of hatch patterns.

Isometric Snap and Grid:	Select to turn the isometric grid on (the default is off).

Isometric Crosshairs:	Select the initial isoplane: top, left (default), or right. You can change the isoplane at any time by pressing F5 or Ctrl+E.

Entity Snaps

Entity Snap Modes:	Select one or more entity snaps to control how entities are drawn.

Clear:	Click to turn all entity snaps off.

Entity Selection

Selection:	Select the methods you want active when you select entities.

Multi-Select Mode: Allows you to select more than one entity at a time; for example you can hold down the Ctrl key and select several entities.

Window drag: Selects entities when you drag the selection rectangle instead of you having to specify two points.

Auto window: Uses window selection or crossing selection (depending on which way you move the cursor) if the program cannot find an entity at the selection point.

Pre-pick: Allows you to select entities before you choose a command.

Entity Selection Pickbox:	Specify the size of the entity selection pickbox, which determines the area of the drawing that is searched for entities when you click in the drawing. The default is 3.

Entity Snap Aperture:	Specify the size of the entity snap aperture, which determines the area of the drawing that is searched for entities when you use an entity snap. The default is 10.

TIP A larger pickbox or aperture makes it easier to select an entity; however, you may accidentally select entities you do not want.

Limits

Drawing limits:	Specify the Upper Right and Lower Left x,y-coordinates to define the extent of the drawing area, or click Select to define the extent by specifying points in the drawing.

Select:	Click to specify the limits from the drawing.

Disallow input beyond limits:	Select to prevent drawing outside the limits (the default is off). This is the same as the Drawing Limits toggle.

The limits settings also affects the extent of the grid display, as well as the Zoom All command, by limiting the grid display and maximum zoom area to that of the drawing limits.


Display

  How To	  Related Topics

The Display tab of the Drawing Settings dialog box controls how information is displayed in IntelliCAD, such as coordinates, highlighting, grip color, and dialog box and prompt defaults. From the Change Settings For list, choose Display, Limits, Grips, Program Interface, or Viewing to set Display defaults.

Dialog box element	Description

Coordinate Display:	Select a format to display the coordinates on the status bar. You can change the coordinate display at any time by pressing F6 or Ctrl+D.

Display

Show solid fill:	Click the check box to display solid filled entities, such as wide polylines, planes, and donuts. When unchecked, the program displays solid filled entities as outlines. The default is checked.

TIP Unchecking solid fill speeds up screen updates and plotting.

Enable quick text:	Click the check box to display all text as rectangular outlines. The default is unchecked. The quick text option does not take effect until after you use the Regenerate command.

TIP Turning on quick text speeds up screen updates and plotting.

Highlight item when selected:	Click the check box to display selected entities in a dashed pattern. Doing this helps you see which entities have been selected. The default is checked.

Show marker blips:	Click the check box to display a plus sign (+) each time you specify a point. This is a temporary marker, and it does not plot. Marker blips help you see where you specified points, but they can make the screen appear cluttered. To remove them, use the Redraw command. The default is unchecked.

Entity dragging:	Select the method you want the program to use to display dragged entities.

UCS Icon:	Select whether you want the UCS icon turned off, turned on (the default), or displayed at the origin (0,0,0). When you select On, the UCS icon is displayed in the lower-right corner of the window.

Limits

Drawing limits:	Specify the Upper Right and Lower Left x,y-coordinates to define the extent of the drawing area, or click Select to define the extent by specifying points in the drawing.

Select:	Click to specify the limits from the drawing.

Disallow input beyond limits:	Click the check box to prevent drawing outside the limits (the default is unchecked). This is the same as the Drawing Limits toggle.

The limits settings also affect the extent of the grid display, as well as the Zoom All command, by limiting the grid display and maximum zoom area to that of the drawing limits.

Grips

Enable grips:	Click the check box to display grips when an entity is selected. The default is checked.

Grip size:	Specify the size of the grip square. The default is 3 pixels.

Grip color:	Select the color for the grips. The default is green.

Program Interface

Enable dialog boxes for file selection:	Click the check box to display a dialog box whenever a file must be opened or imported to use a command. When unchecked, you are prompted for a file name at the command line. The default is checked.

Enable dialog boxes for other commands:	This option is not implemented.

Enable text screen echo:	Click the check box to have command-line text displayed in the Prompt History window.

Disable menu item echo:	Prevents command names from displaying in the command bar when they are chosen. The default is unchecked.

Disable system prompts from menu:	This option is not implemented.

Enable Undo Command:	Click the check box to turn the Undo command off. The default is checked.

Enable Undo Groups	Click the check box to turn the Undo Mark feature on. An Undo Mark is a break point in the sequence of commands that limits how far back you can undo at one time. The default is unchecked.

Command line:	Select whether special characters entered in the command bar are interpreted literally or considered special LISP command characters. For example, if you select Read Text Literally, the open parenthesis character is not visible at the start of a LISP expression.

Viewing

Displays the current viewing settings. These settings are for your information only and cannot be changed through this dialog box.


Entity Creation

  How To	  Related Topics

The Entity Creation tab of the Drawing Settings dialog box controls the default settings for new entities, such as color, layer, linetype, and scale; text height; and hatch pattern. From the Change Settings For list, choose Attributes, Donuts, Ellipse, Freehand Sketches, Hatches, Insertions, Points, Polylines and Traces, Shapes, or Text to set Entity Creation defaults.

Dialog box element	Description

Entity layer:	Select the layer on which new entities are drawn. The default is 0.

Entity linetype: 	Select the linetype for new entities. The default is BYLAYER.

Global linetype scale:	Select a scale to apply to all new entities. The default is 1.0.

Entity color: 	Select a color for all new entities. Click Select Color to select from a palette of colors. The default is BYLAYER.

Linetype scale: 	Select a linetype scale to apply to all new entities. The default is 1.0.

Attributes

Insertion default settings:	Select whether you want default values used when you insert an attribute or whether you want the program to prompt you for settings (the default).

Default attribute modes:	Click the check box if you want an attribute hidden (not displayed in the drawing unless Attribute Display is turned on); fixed (value is constant and cannot be changed); validated (you are prompted to confirm the value on insertion); and/or defined (the attribute takes on its default value, unless you change it). The default is all boxes unchecked.

Attribute insertion methods:	When you insert an attribute, you can enter the values at the command line (the default), or you can have a dialog box appear listing the attribute tags and their default values.

Attribute display modes:	To force the display of all attributes, select On. When a drawing is cluttered with attribute text, select Off. To only display attributes that do not have the hidden value, select Normal (the default).

Donuts

Outside diameter of donut:	Specify the value for the outer diameter of a donut (the default is 1.0).

Inside diameter of donut:	Specify the value for the inside diameter of a donut (the default is 0.5).

Ellipse

Create true ellipses:	Click to create a mathematically accurate ellipse.

Create ellipses as polylines:	Click to draw the ellipse from polyline arcs, which is compatible with DWG versions R12 and earlier.

Freehand Sketch

Freehand sketching methods:	If you want the freehand sketch created from individual line segments (the default), select the lines option. If you want freehand sketch created as a single polyline, select the polyline option.

Length of segments:	Specify the length of the line or polyline segments. The default is 0.1 units.

Hatches

Pattern name:	From the list, select the name of the hatch pattern that you want.

Pattern scale:	Specify the scale factor of the hatch pattern. In most cases, this matches the drawing scale.

Pattern angle:	Specify the angle of the hatch pattern. In most cases, leave this setting at 0 degrees, because the hatch pattern is usually already created at the proper angle.

Pattern styles:	Select whether you want the hatch pattern applied in standard mode, in which the alternating interior areas are hatched (the default), outer mode, in which only the outermost ring is hatched, or all, in which  everything within the outermost boundary is hatched, including text.

Hatching with lines:	If the hatch pattern is being applied as lines, click the check box to enable crosshatching, where a second pattern is applied at 90 degrees. Specify the spacing that you want between lines.

TIP The rotation angle and x,y-origin of hatch patterns is also controlled by the Snap origin and rotation settings.

Insertions

Default block name:	Enter the name of the block (there is no default name).

Insertion base point:	Specify the x,y,z coordinates for the insertion point of the block (the default is 0,0,0). Click Select to specify a point in the drawing.

Points

Point size:	Specify the point size that you want. A value of 0 draws the points at 5% of the window size.

Point display type:	Select the appearance that you want for the point.

Polylines and Traces

Polyline width:	Specify the width of polylines (the default is 0).

Trace width:	Specify the width of traces (the default is 0.5).

Apply linetypes continuously to newly created polylines:	When a linetype is applied to a polyline, the linetype can start and stop with every polyline segment (the default is off), or it can start and stop with the start and end points of the entire polyline length.

Shapes

Shape name:	This option is not implemented.

Text

Default text height:	Specify the height of text. The default is 0.2 units. When the value is 0.0, the Text (line), Text (paragraph), and Multiline Text commands prompt you for text height.

Default text style:	Select the name for the text style.

Explore text styles:	Click Explore Text Styles to display the Drawing Explorer.


Entity Modification

  How To	  Related Topics

The Entity Modification tab of the Drawing Settings dialog box controls the way entities are edited, such as how text is mirrored, how corners are filleted, and how lines are trimmed. From the Change Settings For list, choose Chamfer/Fillet, Spline/Fit, or Trim/Extend to set Entity Modification defaults.

Dialog box element	Description

Mirror option:	Select an option to control the orientation of mirrored text.

Default offset distance:	Specify the distance used by the Offset command. A value of less than zero offsets the entity through a point (the Through option). A value greater than zero sets the offset distance.

Chamfer and Fillet

Remove corners:	Select to trim the corner to fit the chamfer lines or fillet radius.

Retain corners:	Select to not trim the corner to fit the chamfer lines or fillet radius.

Fillet radius:	Specify the radius for fillet arcs; the default is 0.5 units. Click Select to specify two points on the screen that represent the radius.

Chamfer distances and angles:	Specify the distance and optional angle for creating chamfers. You can choose between two distances or a distance and an angle.

Spline and Fit

Number of points per curved segment:	Select the number of points for the program to use to create curved segments along a polyline. The default is 8.

Display control polyline frame:	Click the check box to display the frame of a splined polyline. The default is off.

Trim and Extend

Projection mode:	Select one of the three projection modes.

Use implied edges to Trim/Extend:	Click the check box to have entities extended by an imaginary line or arc, which becomes part of the trim or extend boundary.


3D Settings

  How To	  Related Topics

The 3D Settings tab of the Drawing Settings dialog box controls how three-dimensional entities are created, such as the default thickness and elevation, shading, and surface creation defaults. From the Change Settings For list, choose Shading or Surfaces to set 3D Settings defaults.

Dialog box element	Description

Current 3D thickness:	Specify a value for the thickness of entities, such as point, line, arc, circle, and polyline.

Current 3D elevation:	Specify a value for the elevation in the z-direction. All entities are drawn with the base at this elevation, unless overridden. The default is 0.

Show plan view when changing UCS:	Click the check box to display the plan view when changing the UCS.

Shading

Edge shading:	Select the type of shading that you want:

Shade faces, no edges: equivalent to 256-color shading.

Shade faces, edges in background color: 256-color shading with outlined faces.

No faces, edges in entity color: equivalent to hidden-line removal.

Faces in entity color, edges in background color: equivalent to 16-color shading.

Surface

Surface settings:	Select the density used to create surfaces with the Revolved Surface, Ruled Surface, and Extruded Surface  commands.

Surface type:	Select the type of smoothing created by the Smooth option of the Edit Polyline command.


Render Settings

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Rendering > Render Settings ( [image])

Menu: View > Rendering > Render Settings

Keyboard: SETRENDER

Alias: RPREF

Defines the settings used to render images, such as smoothing, base materials, and shadow resolution. The changes you make to these settings do not apply immediately to an image that you have already created; you must use the Render or Full Render command again to see your changes. Render settings are saved in the drawing file. To revert all render settings to their default values, click Reset All on the Render Settings dialog box.

The presentation of some model images, especially mechanical models, is more attractive when displayed on a base. The program automatically creates a base for images when you use the Render and Full Render commands, but base materials are only applied when you use Full Render. The program calculates the default base size from the extent of the model, which is like an imaginary box around all the entities. Shadows of the entity can be projected onto the base, or the base can be made reflective to mirror an image of the model.

TIP Avoid using shadows until you really need them because they consume a lot of memory, especially in models with glass or mirror. To preview shadows, try reducing the shadow resolution. Doing so may produce a coarse-looking shadow boundary, but lets you quickly set up lights and shadows just before creating a final, high-quality image.

To define settings for Rendering

On the Render Settings dialog box, click the Rendering tab to set up global rendering properties.

Dialog box element	Description

Clear Screen Before Render	Clears the viewport before rendering. If the box is not checked (off), you see the wireframe model as it renders. The default is checked (on).

Enable Smoothing	Smoothes curves in the rendered image to make it look more realistic. Turning it off (unchecking the box) speeds up the rendering process, but makes any curved meshes in the image look faceted. The default is checked.

Double Sided	Indicates whether rendering ignores (hides) the back faces of surfaces. Surfaces are defined as front or back faces, depending on the order in which the vertices that define the surface are placed. Vertices placed in counterclockwise order define a back face; vertices placed in clockwise order define a front face. Turning this option off can speed up rendering on large models, but may cause undesirable results. The default is checked.

Update Every Render	Uses the latest information in the drawing for each rendering. If you turn this option off, changes you make to the drawing are ignored. Each time you render the image, it will look the same as it did before you turned this setting off. The default is checked.

To define settings for Base

To select a material for the base, click Edit Material , and then choose the base material you want and click OK. Next, adjust the Material Scale to create the surface texture you want by entering a value in the field. The smaller the scale value, the denser the pattern or texture. You can make the base larger or smaller by dragging the slider left or right, or you can turn the base off by clicking the Enable Base check box.

Dialog box element	Description

Material Scale	Scales the material swatch to fill the base area. The higher the scale value, the larger and coarser the material pattern; the lower the scale value, the smaller and denser the pattern. The default scale is 1.0.

Edit Material	Lets you choose the base material. Select from the list of displayed material types. These materials are bitmap swatches that are scaled to fit the model base when you use Full Render. The default material is Dark Stone.

Base Size	Sets the relative size of the model base. Adjust the base size by dragging the slider left (smaller) or right (larger). The program calculates the default base size by determining the extent of your model along the x,y-axes and adding a small percentage to the area. The larger the base, the wider the area around the model; the smaller the base, the narrower the area around the model. The smallest base size covers the area below the extent of the model.

Enable Base	Turns the automatic model base on or off for rendered images. Use this option to turn the base off for models that do not need a base, such as an image of a flying aircraft or a space vehicle. The default is on.

To define settings for Shadows

To adjust shadows, click the Shadows tab on the Render Settings dialog box, and then drag the Shadow Resolution slider left or right. To turn all shadows off, click Enable Shadows.

Dialog box element	Description

Shadow Resolution	Sets the relative resolution of shadows in rendered images. To adjust the shadow resolution, drag the slider left (lower) or right (higher). The lower the resolution, the coarser the edges of shadows; the higher the resolution, the finer the edges of shadows. Setting the shadow resolution to Low can speed up rendering on larger, more complex models. The default resolution is medium (the midpoint of the slider).

Enable Shadows	Turns shadows on or off for rendered images. Turning shadows off can speed up rendering significantly. The default is on.

To export rendered images

To export rendered images, click the Export tab on the Render Settings dialog box. Enter a file name and extension (the extension determines the file format), set the width and height, and then click either the Render or Full Render tool to begin exporting. The file is rendered as it is exported. The following file formats and extensions are supported: Windows Bitmap (*.bmp), PostScript (*.ps), and TIFF (*.tif)

Dialog box element	Description

File Name	Determines the name, location, and format of the rendered image file to export. To find a location and file name, or to select a file type, click Browse

Width	Sets the height of the image in pixels.

Height	Sets the width of the image in pixels.

Render To File	Choose Render or Full Render to determine how the model is rendered and export the image.

  Command List


Base Materials

Base materials are applied to the model base when you use Full Render. These materials help the rendered image look more realistic on top of a tile, stone, wood, or metal base.

To select the Base Material

To select a base material, click the Base tab on the Render Settings dialog box, and then click Edit Material. Select a material from those displayed, and then click OK. To turn the model base off, click Enable Base.

Dialog box element	Description

Maple	Simulates maple wood grain.

Mahogany	Simulates mahogany wood grain.

Light Stone	Simulates a light-colored stone with a coarse, granite-like texture.

Dark Stone	Simulates a dark-colored stone with a fine, slate-like texture.

Paving	Simulates light-colored paver tiles that look like bricks.

Tiling	Simulates terracotta tiles.

Blue Marble	Simulates a dark-colored stone with a marble-like texture.

Silver	Simulates silver plating.

Gold	Simulates gold plating

  Command List


Set UCS

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > User Coordinate Systems ( [image])

Menu: Settings > User Coordinate Systems

Keyboard: SETUCS

Alias: UCP, DDUCSP

Displays the User Coordinate Systems dialog box so you can select the UCS from various preset definitions.

  Command List


Variable Settings

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Tools > Inquiry > Variable Settings

Keyboard: SETVAR

Alias: SET

Displays or changes system variables.

Variable name or ?: To display or change a variable, enter the variable name. To display a list of variables, choose ?.

See System Variables for a complete list of IntelliCAD System Variables.

  Command List


Preset Viewpoints

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Preset Viewpoints ( [image])

Menu: View > Preset Viewpoints

Keyboard: SETVPOINT

Displays the Preset Viewpoints dialog box so you can change the direction in which three-dimensional entities are viewed. To dynamically view your drawing, use the VIEWCTL command.

  Command List


Shade

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Rendering > Shade ( [image])

Menu: View > Rendering > Shade

Keyboard: SHADE

Alias: SHA

Removes hidden lines, then applies flat shading to all visible surfaces. Shaded entities can only be viewed, not saved or exported. Because they are intended to provide a quick visualization, shaded images do not have a light source and use continuous colors across surfaces, causing them to appear flat and unrealistic. Shaded images use the layer visibility of the colors of the drawing. Any changes you make after entities are shaded will not appear immediately; you must use the Shade command again to see your changes.

Shaded image

To remove shading, use either the Redraw or the Regenerate commands.

On the Drawing Settings dialog box, use the 3D Settings tab to control the appearance of the shaded image. You can shade the surfaces and edges of the model in four different ways:

•	Faces shaded; edges not highlighted.

•	Faces shaded; edges highlighted in the screen color.

•	Faces empty; edges drawn using the entity color (similar to the hidden-line view produced by Hide ).

•	Faces filled using the entity color; edges highlighted in the screen color.

  Command List


Snap

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Snap ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Snap

Keyboard: SNAP

Shortcut: F9

Alias: SN

Restricts cursor movement to specified increments.

Snap is off (x and y = 0.50000): On · Rotate · Style · Aspect · <Snap spacing>: To set the snap spacing, enter a value (the current value is displayed in the command). To turn snap off, choose Off. To turn snap on, choose On. To specify the rotation of the snap grid, choose Rotate. To change the snap grid to isometric, choose Style. To change the aspect ratio of the grid, choose Aspect.

If isometric snap is on, the following prompt appears:

Snap is on, isometric, y = 0.50000: Off · Rotate · Style · Aspect · <Spacing in y direction>: To set the snap spacing in the y-direction, enter a value (the current value is displayed in the command). To turn snap off, choose Off. To turn snap on, choose On. To specify the rotation of the snap grid, choose Rotate. To change the snap grid to standard, choose Style.

To specify the rotation of the snap grid

Choose Rotate.

Base point for snap grid <0.0000,0.0000>: Select the base point.

Rotation angle <0º>: Enter a rotation angle. To rotate the grid clockwise, enter a negative value. To rotate the grid counterclockwise, enter a positive number.

To change the snap grid to isometric or standard

Choose Style.

Isometric · <Standard>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the snap grid, choose Isometric or Standard.

To change the snap grid to isometric

An isometric grid is a grid at 30- and 150-degree angles. You can rotate the grid, but it must have the same aspect (the same x,y spacing).

Choose Isometric.

Vertical spacing <0.5000>: To accept the current spacing, press Enter. To change the spacing, enter a new value.

To change the snap grid to standard

The standard grid is rectangular and is parallel to the x- and y-axes. You can change the aspect of the grid to use different x,y spacing.

Choose Standard.

Aspect · Vertical spacing <0.5000>: To accept the current spacing, press Enter. To change the spacing, enter a value. To change the aspect ratio, choose Aspect.

To change the aspect ratio of the grid

To create different horizontal and vertical snap spacing, change the aspect ratio of the grid.

Choose Aspect. You can change the aspect when snap is set to standard.

Horizontal spacing <0.5000>: To accept the current spacing, press Enter. To change the spacing, enter a value.

Vertical spacing <0.5000>: To accept the current spacing, press Enter. To change the spacing, enter a value.

  Command List


Spelling

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Check Spelling ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Spelling

Keyboard: SPELL

Alias: SP

Checks the spelling of text in the drawing.

Select entities to check spelling: Select the entities that you want checked for spelling. You can select text entities created using DTEXT or MTEXT. If the program detects a misspelling or does not recognize a word, the Spelling dialog box appears, from which you can make choices.

  Command List


Sphere

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Sphere ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Sphere

Keyboard: SPHERE

Alias: AI_SPHERE

Draws a three-dimensional spherical entity.

A Select the radius of the sphere.	Result.
Center of sphere: Specify the center point of the sphere.

Diameter · <Radius of sphere>: To draw a sphere by specifying its radius, the default method, choose a second point or enter a value (in drawing units). To draw a sphere by specifying its diameter, choose Diameter.

To draw a sphere by specifying its diameter

Choose Diameter.

Diameter of sphere: Specify two points or enter a value (in drawing units) for the diameter.

  Command List


Spline

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 2D > Spline ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Spline

Keyboard: SPLINE

Alias: SPL

Draws a free-form curve.

A Select the first point through which the spline passes. B Select the second point of the spline. C Last spline selection point.	Result.
Convert polyline · <First point for spline>: Specify the first point through which the spline passes. To convert a polyline to a spline entity, choose Convert polyline.

Second point: Specify a second point of the spline.

Close · Fit tolerance · <Next point>: Specify the next point of the spline. To close the spline entity, choose Close. To change the tolerance of the curve, choose Fit tolerance. Continue to specify points of the spline. To complete the command, press Enter.

Enter tangent: Select a point to specify the tangency of the spline curve at the first point.

Enter tangent for ending point: When you create an open-ended spline entity, you are prompted to enter the tangent for the ending point. Select a point to specify the tangency of the spline curve at the end point.

To convert a polyline to a spline

To change the tolerance of the curve

Choose Fit tolerance.

Enter fit tolerance (in drawing units) <0.0000>: To accept the current setting, press Enter, or enter the tolerance of the curve.

  Command List


Status Bar

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: View > Status Bar

Keyboard: STATBAR

Shortcut: F10

Turns the status at the bottom of the IntelliCAD window on or off.

  Command List


Status

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Tools > Inquiry > Drawing Status

Keyboard: STATUS

Displays all dimensioning variables and their values in the Prompt History window. You can view the settings for the drawing file name and path; drawing limits; screen size; insertion base; snap resolution; grid spacing; current layer, color and linetype; fill, grid, orthogonal, snap, marker blips and drag settings; command echo setting; positive angle direction; angular and dimension units; and pickbox height.

  Command List


Stop Recording

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Tools > Stop Recording ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Stop Recording

Keyboard: STOPSCRIPT

Stops the recording of scripts.

  Command List


Stretch

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Stretch ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Stretch

Keyboard: STRETCH

Alias: S

Moves a portion of a drawing while retaining connections to other parts of the drawing. You can stretch lines, polyline segments, rays.

A Select the entities to stretch. B Select the base point. C Select the displacement point.	Result.
Select entities to stretch by crossing-window or crossing-polygon: Choose the entities you want to stretch by drawing a crossing window or a crossing polygon, and then press Enter.

The end points within the crossing window or crossing polygon are moved, leaving the other end points in their original location. Entities entirely within the crossing window or crossing polygon are moved, not stretched.

Base point or displacement: Specify the point that you want used for the base or displacement point.

Second point of displacement: Specify a second point to indicate the distance you want the entities stretched (the distance from the first to the second point). To use the first point you selected as the x,y displacement point, press Enter.

  Command List


System Windows

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: SYSWINDOWS

Rearranges open drawing windows and icons. Windows can be cascaded or tiled.

Arrange MDI windows: Horizontally · Vertically · Arrange icons · <Cascade>: To cascade open drawings in the application window, choose Cascade, or press Enter to accept the default setting. To horizontally tile drawings, choose Horizontally. To vertically tile drawings, choose Vertically. To arrange the minimized icons of open drawings, choose Arrange icons.

  Command List


Extruded Surface

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Extruded Surface ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Extruded Surface

Keyboard: TABSURF

Creates a polygon mesh that approximates a tabulated surface defined by a path and a direction. You can use the Extruded Surface command to extrude lines, arcs, circles, or polylines.

You can use the SURFTAB1 system variable to define the number of M-direction surfaces on the extruded entity. When you extrude a line, arc, or circle, the number of M-direction surfaces is evenly divided using the SURFTAB1 variable. When you extrude a polyline, extrusion lines are drawn at the ends of the line segments, and the arc segments are divided evenly into the number of surfaces specified in SURFTAB1. If the polyline has been curved (fitted) or splined, the number of M-direction surfaces is evenly divided using the SURFTAB1 variable.

The entity you select for the extrusion path defines the direction and length of the sides, the N-direction.

A Select the entity you want to extrude. B Select the entity for the extrusion path.	Result.
Select entity to extrude: Select the entity you want to extrude. The entity is the path curve that defines the surface of the mesh.

Select line or open polyline for extrusion path: Select a line or polyline for the extrusion path. The direction and length of the line determine the direction and length of the extrusion. Only the first and last points of a polyline are used when determining the extrusion path. The point at which you specify the entity determines the extrusion direction.

  Command List


Tangent Snap

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Entity Snaps > Set Tangent Snap ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Entity Snap > Tangent Snap

Keyboard: TANGENT

Toggles the Tangent snap on or off. When set to ON, you can snap a new entity that you are drawing to the tangent of an arc or a circle.

A	Draw a line tangent to another entity.

  Command List


Toolbar Configuration

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: View > Toolbars

Keyboard: TBCONFIG

Alias: TO

Displays the Select Toolbars dialog box so you can select the toolbars you want displayed. You can also specify how tools are displayed on the toolbars.

  Command List


Text (Single Line)

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: TEXT

Alias: -T, TX

Creates a single line of text in the drawing area.

  Command List


Thickness

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > Thickness ( [image])

Menu: Settings > Thickness

Keyboard: THICKNESS

Sets the thickness value for all new entities. The default thickness is 0. Thickness is defined as the height of an entity in the Z direction. All linetypes can have a thickness, except ellipses, elliptical arcs, and splines.

Two-dimensional entities.	Two-dimensional entities with thickness added.
To edit the thickness of an existing entity, use the Properties command.

  Command List


Time Variables

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Inquiry > Time Variables ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Inquiry > Time Variables

Keyboard: TIME

Alias: TI

Displays the current date and time and the creation and update dates and times of the current drawing. You can turn the elapsed timer on or off.

When you activate this command, the current date and time and the creation and update dates and times of the current drawing are displayed in the command bar. You can scroll up in the command bar to view this information, or you can view this information in the Prompt History window. Total editing time and the time that has elapsed since you began this drawing is also included.

ON · OFF · Display · Reset: To turn the timer on, choose ON. To turn the timer off, choose OFF. To display the creation and update dates and times, choose Display. To reset the timer, choose Reset.

  Command List


Tip of the Day

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Help > Tip of the Day

Keyboard: TIPOFDAY

Displays the Tip of the Day dialog box. To display the Tip of the Day when you start the program, check the box to Show Tips on StartUp. To prevent the Tip of the Day from displaying, click the check box to uncheck it. To display the next tip, click Next Tip. To close the Tip of the Day dialog box, click Close.

  Command List


Tolerance

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Dimensioning > Tolerance ( [image])

Menu: Insert > Dimensions > Tolerance

Keyboard: TOLERANCE

Alias: TOL

Displays the Geometric Tolerance dialog box so you can define the geometric variations in the active drawing. Tolerances specify the level of accuracy for proper function and fit of entities you draw.

  Command List


Toolbar

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: View > Toolbars

Keyboard: TOOLBAR

Enter Toolbar name(s) to show or hide, ALL, or <?>: To display the Select Toolbars dialog box, press Enter. To show or hide toolbars, enter the name or click the check box next to the toolbar name.

To show or hide toolbars

Enter the toolbar name.

Show or Hide: To show the toolbar, choose Show. To hide the toolbar, choose Hide.

  Command List


Torus

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Torus ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Torus

Keyboard: TORUS

Alias: TOR, AI_TORUS

Draws a donut-shaped, three-dimensional entity. A torus is defined by two radius values: one for the tube and another from the center of the torus to the center of the tube.

A	Specify the center point of the torus.

B	Specify the radius of the whole torus.

C	Specify the radius of the tube.

You can draw a torus with no center, a self-intersecting torus, by specifying that the radius of the tube is greater than the radius of the torus.

An example of an intersecting torus.

Center of whole torus: Specify the center point of the torus.

Diameter · <Radius of whole torus>: Specify a second point for the radius of the torus, or enter a value in drawing units. To specify the diameter of the whole torus, choose Diameter. The whole torus is measured from the center of the torus to the center of the tube.

Diameter · <Radius of body of torus>: Specify two points for the radius of the body of the torus, or enter a value in drawing units. To specify the diameter of the body of the torus, choose Diameter. The body of the torus is the tube.

  Command List


Trim

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Trim ( [image])

Menu: Modify > Trim

Keyboard: TRIM

Alias: TR

Erases the portions of selected entities that cross a specified boundary. You can trim lines and open two- and three-dimensional polylines, rays, arcs, and circles. Entities that you can use as the cutting entities are arcs, circles, lines, polylines, rays, infinite lines, and viewports in paper space.

A Select the entity you want to use as the cutting point. B Select the entity you want to trim.	Result
Select cutting entities for trim: Select the entity that you want to use as the cutting point.

Edge mode · Fence · <Select entity to trim>: Select the entity you want to trim. To trim the entity at its implied edge or to an entity that intersects it in three-dimensional space, choose Edge. To trim the entity by selecting fence points, choose Fence.

To trim the entity by selecting fence points

You can trim multiple entities to a single entity by specifying fence points.

A Select the cutting entity. B Specify the first fence point. C Specify the last fence point.	Result.
Choose Fence.

First point of fence: Specify the first fence point. A fence point is the beginning point along the cutting entity.

Next point of fence: Specify the next fence point. You can continue to specify fence points until you have trimmed all entities.

To trim the entity using the edge mode

A Select the cutting entity. B Specify to trim the entity using the edge mode, and select the entity you want to trim.	Result.
Choose Edge.

Extend · No extend <No extend>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To specify that the entity is to be trimmed at another entity’s implied edge, choose Extend. To specify that the entity is to be trimmed only to an another entity that intersects it in three-dimensional space, choose No extend.

To trim at an implied edge

Choose Extend.

Edge mode · <Select entity to trim>: Select the entity you want to trim. To change the edge mode, choose Edge Mode.

Edge mode · Undo · <Select entity to trim>: Select the entity you want to trim. To  undo the last trimming, choose Undo. To change the edge mode, choose Edge Mode.

To trim at an actual intersection

Choose No extend.

Edge mode · <Select entity to trim>: Select the entity you want to trim. To change the edge mode, choose Edge Mode.

Edge mode · Undo · <Select entity to trim>: Select the entity you want to trim. To undo the last trimming, choose Undo. To change the edge mode, choose Edge Mode.

  Command List


Undo

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Standard > Undo ( [image])

Menu: Edit > Undo

Keyboard: U

Shortcut: Ctrl+Z

Reverses the effect of the previous command.

  Command List


UCS

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Settings > User Coordinate Systems ( [image])

Menu: Settings > User Coordinate Systems

Keyboard: UCS

Defines or modifies the current user coordinate system. You can use the UCS to create a system for entering coordinates and planes and for viewing drawings. This command defines the UCS in three-dimensional space.

A	Before changing the UCS to the World Coordinate System.

B	After changing the UCS to the World Coordinate System.

A	Before changing the origin of the current UCS.

B	After changing the origin of the current UCS.

C	The new origin (0,0,0).

A	Before changing the UCS to lie along a specified z-axis.

B	After changing the UCS lie along a specified z-axis.

C	The new z-axis.

TIP To use the Drawing Explorer to define the UCS, type EXPUCS .

? · 3point · Delete · Entity · Origin · Previous · Restore · Save · View · X·Y·Z · ZAxis · <World>: To retain the current setting, press Enter. To list all defined UCS definitions, choose ?. To define a new UCS origin and the direction of its x- and y-axes, choose 3point. To delete a saved coordinate system, choose Delete. To define a new UCS origin based on a selected entity, choose Entity. To define a new UCS origin by specifying a new point, choose Origin. To revert to the previous UCS definition, choose Previous. To restore a saved UCS, choose Restore. To save the current setting, choose Save. To define a new UCS with the x,y plane parallel to your screen, choose View. To rotate the current UCS around a specified axis, choose X, Y, or Z. To define a UCS with a particular positive z-axis, choose ZAxis.

To define a new UCS origin and the direction of its x- and y-axes

Choose 3point.

New origin <0.0000, 0.0000, 0.0000>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the UCS origin, enter new values for the x,y,z coordinates or specify a point.

Point on positive X axis <1.0000,0.0000,0.0000>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the positive x-axis, enter new values for the x,y,z coordinates or specify a point.

Point in X-Y plane with positive Y value <0.0000,1.0000,0.0000>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the positive y-axis, enter new values for the x,y,z coordinates or specify a point. You can locate this point anywhere on the positive y of the new UCS xy plane.

To delete a UCS definition

Choose Delete.

UCS name(s) to delete, or ? for list: Enter the names of the UCS definitions you want to delete. To view a list of all UCS definitions, choose ?.

To define a new UCS by selecting an entity

You can define a new UCS by selecting an arc, circle, dimension, line, point, two-dimensional polyline, plane, or three-dimensional face entity. You can also use the insertion point of a text entity, block, external reference, or attribute definition.

Choose Entity.

Select entity for UCS definition: Select the entity you want to use to define the new UCS.

To specify a new UCS origin

Choose Origin.

Origin point <0.0000, 0.0000, 0.0000>: To accept the current setting, press Enter, or enter new values. The direction of the x-, y-, and z-axes are unchanged.

To load a saved UCS definition

Choose Restore.

UCS name to restore: Enter the name of the UCS definition you want to restore. The viewing direction in effect when the UCS was saved is not restored; the restored entities take on the current UCS.

To save a UCS definition

Choose Save.

Enter name for saving UCS, or ? for list: Enter a name for the saved UCS definition. To view a list of all saved UCS definitions, choose ?.

To rotate the current UCS around a specified axis

Choose X, Y, or Z.

Enter angle of rotation about X[Y,Z] axis <0>: Enter the angle of rotation for the specified axis.

To define a new UCS with a specified positive z axis

Choose ZAxis.

Origin point <0.0000,0.0000,0.0000>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the UCS origin, enter new values for the x,y,z coordinates or specify a point.

Point on positive Z-axis <0.0000,0.0000,1.0000>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the positive z-axis, enter new values for the x,y,z coordinates or specify a point.

  Command List


UCS Icon

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: UCSICON

Turns the display of the UCS icon on or off.

  Command List


Undefine

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: UNDEFINE

Allows a command defined by another program to override an IntelliCAD command. You can then redefine the command to perform another function.

Command to undefine: Enter the standard IntelliCAD command name.

You cannot undefine commands that are defined by LISP or SDS programs or other external commands. If a LISP or SDS program has redefined a command with the same name as a standard IntelliCAD command, the command defined by the program will be active. To activate a standard IntelliCAD command, precede the command name with a period.

TIP To restore an undefined command, use REDEFINE.

  Command List


Undelete

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: UNDELETE

Alias: OO, OOPS

Redraws entities that the program erases when you create blocks. In the step immediately preceding the current step, the Undelete command also restores entities removed by the last erase or delete command.

  Command List


Undo Multiple

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: UNDO

Reverses the effect of the most recent command. Also reverses the effect of multiple commands and controls the UNDO command.

Undo: Mark · BAck to mark · BEgin set · End set · Control · Auto · <Number of steps to undo>: To specify the number of steps to undo, enter a value. To place a mark so you can undo all commands back to that mark, choose Mark. To undo all commands back to a specific mark, choose BAck to mark. To group a sequence of operations, choose BEgin set. To end a set, choose End set. To change the Undo settings (turn on or off or change the number of commands that can be undone to one), choose Control. To undo a menu selection as a single command, choose Auto.

To change the undo settings

Choose Control.

Undo control: All · None · One: To turn the Undo command on, choose All. To turn the Undo command off, choose None. To limit the Undo command to a single undo action, choose One.

To undo a menu selection as a single command

Choose Auto.

You can use the UNDO Auto command when you want to undo a menu selection with a single U command. If a menu item is not already active, this command inserts an UNDO Begin Set at the start of each menu item and an UNDO End Set when you exit the menu item. To use UNDO Auto, you must have the Control setting for All turned on.

  Command List


Units

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: UNITS

Alias: -UN

Displays the Prompt History window, which shows each of the measurement units and their respective measurements for the selected entity. Select unit measurement options from the prompt box. To see the choices for the prompts that follow, leave the Prompt History window turned on.

Unit mode 1-5 <2>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the units setting, enter the corresponding number for the setting displayed in the Prompt History window.

To use Scientific, Decimal, or Engineering units

Choose 1, 2, or 3.

Number of decimal places for LUNITS 0-8 <4>: To accept the current setting, press Enter, or enter the number of decimal places you want.

Angular unit mode 0-4 <0>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the units setting, enter the number that corresponds to the setting displayed in the Prompt History window.

Number of decimal places for angular units 0-8 <0>: Enter the number of decimal points for the selected angular units.

Angle 0 direction <0º[E]>: Enter the direction.

Do you want angles measured clockwise? <N>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To measure angles clockwise, choose Yes. If you do not want to measure angles clockwise, choose No.

To use Architectural or Fractional units

Choose 4 or 5.

To see the choices for the prompts that follow, leave the Prompt History window turned on.

Enter greatest denominator to use for fractional display 1, 2, 3, 8 16, 32, 63, 128, or 256 <16>: To accept the default, press Enter, or enter one of the denominators listed.

 Angular unit mode 0-5 <0>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the units setting, enter the number that corresponds to the setting displayed in the Prompt History window.

Number of decimal places for angular units 0-8 <0>: Enter the number of decimal points for the selected angular units.

Angle 0 direction <0º[E]>: Enter the direction.

Do you want angles measured clockwise? <N>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To measure angles clockwise, choose Yes. If you do not want to measure angles clockwise, choose No.

TIP To go back to your drawing, press F2.

  Command List


VBA Editor

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Tools > Visual Basic Editor ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Visual Basic for Applications > Visual Basic Editor

Keyboard: VBA

Alias: VBAIDE

Starts the Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) program and displays the Visual Basic window. With VBA, you can modify menus and toolbars, create custom menus, dialog boxes, command aliases, and scripts,  and add custom programs.

  Command List


VBA Load Project

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Tools > Visual Basic for Applications > Load Project

Keyboard: VBALOAD

Loads a Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) program so you can customize IntelliCAD.

  Command List


VBA Run Macros

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Tools > Visual Basic for Applications > Macros

Keyboard: VBARUN

Displays the Macros dialog box so you can define a Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) macro.

  Command List


VBA Unload Project

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Tools > Visual Basic for Applications > Unload Project

Keyboard: VBAUNLOAD

Unloads the Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) program .

  Command List


View Save/Restore

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Save/Restore View ( [image])

Menu: View > Save/Restore View

Keyboard: VIEW

Alias: -V

Saves the current display as a named view, or restores a saved view to the display.

NOTE You cannot use View Save/Restore as a transparent command when you are in paper space, during VIEWPOINT or DVIEW, or when zooming or panning the display.

View: ? to list saved views · Delete · Restore · Save · Window: To list the saved views for the current drawing, choose ?. To delete a view, choose Delete. To make a saved view the current view, choose Restore. To save the current view, choose Save. To save a portion of the current display as a view, choose Window.

To delete a view

Choose Delete.

View to be deleted: Enter the name of the view you want to delete.

To restore a view

Choose Restore.

View to restore: Enter the name of the view you want to make current.

To save a view

Choose Save.

Save view as: Enter the name of the view you want to save.

To save a portion of the display as a view

Choose Window.

Save view as: Enter the name of the view you want to create.

First corner of view window: Specify the first corner of the view.

Opposite corner: Specify the opposite corner.

  Command List


View Control

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Dynamic View Control ( [image])

Menu: View > Dynamic View Control

Keyboard: VIEWCTL

Alias: VP, DDVPOINT

Displays the View Control dialog box so you can dynamically control the viewports.

  Command List


Viewpoint

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Preset Viewpoints ( [image])

Menu: View > Look From

Keyboard: VIEWPOINT

Alias: -VP, VPOINT

Selects the viewpoint for a three-dimensional look at your drawing. You can specify a point in three-dimensional space to look back at the origin (0,0,0). You can select viewpoints when you are viewing a drawing in model space. You cannot use this command in paper space.

Top view.	Front view.	3-dimensional view.
PErspective · PLan · Rotate · <View point> <0.000000,0.000000,1.000000>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To specify a new point from which to view your drawing, select the viewpoint coordinates, or enter new values for the x-,y-, and z-axes. To view the drawing in perspective, choose PErspective. To change the plan view, choose PLan. To rotate the view, choose Rotate.

To view the drawing in perspective

Choose PErspective.

Perspective ON · OFF <Off>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To turn perspective on, choose ON. To turn perspective off, choose OFF.

Perspective: Front clipping · Back clipping · OFF · <ON>: To turn front clipping on, choose Front clipping. To turn back clipping on, choose Back clipping. To turn perspective off, choose OFF.

To change the plan view

Choose PLan.

Plan view of: UCS · World · <Current UCS>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To change the plan view to a defined UCS, choose UCS. To change the plan view to the World Coordinate System, choose World.

To change the plan view to a defined UCS

Choose UCS.

? to list · <Name of UCS>: Enter the name of a defined UCS. To view a list of UCS definitions, choose ?.

To rotate the view

You can specify the new viewing direction by selecting the two angles in which to view the drawing.

Choose Rotate.

Angle in XY plane from X axis <270°>: To accept the current setting, press Enter, or enter a new value.

Angle from XY plane <90°>: To accept the current setting, press Enter, or enter a new value.

  Command List


Viewports

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Viewports ( [image])

Menu: View > Viewports

Keyboard: VIEWPORTS

Alias: VW, VPORT, VPORTS

Divides the drawing display into multiple viewports, each of which can contain a different view of the current drawing. TILEMODE must be set to 1 (on).

An example of 3 viewports.

Create viewports: ? to list · Save · Restore · Delete · SIngle · Join · 2 · 3 · 4: To save the current viewports, choose Save. To recall a saved viewport, choose Restore. To delete a viewport, choose Delete. To return the drawing to one viewport, choose SIngle. To combine two viewports into one large viewport, choose Join. To create two, three, or four viewports, choose 2, 3, or 4.

To save the current viewports

Choose Save.

Viewport configuration name to save: Enter a name for the saved viewports.

To recall a saved viewport

Choose Restore.

Viewport configuration name to restore: Enter the name of the saved viewport you want to recall.

To delete the current viewport

Choose Delete.

Viewport configuration name to delete: Enter the name of the saved viewport you want to delete.

To return the drawing to one viewport

Choose SIngle. The drawing is displayed in one viewport.

To combine two viewports

Choose Join.

Select inside dominate viewport <Current>: To select the current viewport, press Enter, or click inside the primary viewport.

Select inside viewport to join: Click inside the viewport you want to join.

  Command List


View Resolution

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: VIEWRES

Controls the precision and speed of drawing circles and arcs on the screen by specifying the number of sides in a circle.

Low precision setting.	High precision setting.
Do you want fast zooms? <Yes>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. If you want fast zooms, choose Yes. If you do not want fast zooms, choose No.

Enter circle zoom percent: Enter the percentage you want to zoom.  When you enter a higher percentage, your circles and arcs appear smoother.

TIP When you use fast zooms, the ZOOM, PAN, and VIEW Restore commands are performed quickly because the viewport is simply redrawn, rather than regenerated. When you do not use fast zooms, the ZOOM, PAN, and VIEW Restore commands regenerate the viewport.

  Command List


Visible Intersection Snap

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: VISIBLE

Toggles the Visible Intersection snap on or off. Use this command to snap an entity to the apparent intersection of another entity. If an intersection point is not possible, the intersection is the imaginary point if the entity were extended to intersect the selected entity. You can snap to the visible intersection of arcs, circles, ellipses, elliptical arcs, lines, polylines, rays, or infinite lines. If the target covers only one entity, the program prompts you to select a second entity and then snaps to the point at which the two would appear to intersect if they were of infinite length.

A The apparent intersection of two entities.	Plan view showing entity positions.
  Command List


View Snapshot

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Tools > View Snapshot ( [image])

Menu: Tools > View Snapshot

Keyboard: VSNAPSHOT

Alias: VS, VSLIDE

Displays the View Snapshot dialog box so you can view a previously created slide file.

  Command List


Save Block

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Tools > Save Block to Disk ( [image])

Menu: Tools > Save Block to Disk

Keyboard: WBLOCK

Alias: W

Displays the Save Block dialog box so you can save selected entities to a drawing file on disk. You can insert a block that has been saved to disk into other drawings.

  Command List


Window Cascade

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Window > Cascade

Keyboard: WCASCADE

Cascades all open drawing windows.

  Command List


Window Close

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Window > Close

Keyboard: WCLOSE

Closes the active drawing window. A prompt is displayed asking whether you want to save changes to the drawing.

  Command List


Window Close All

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Window > Close All

Keyboard: WCLOSEALL

Alias: CLOSEALL

Closes all drawing windows. A prompt is displayed asking whether you want to save changes to the drawing.

  Command List


Wedge

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Draw 3D > Wedge ( [image])

Menu: Insert > 3D Entities > Wedge

Keyboard: WEDGE

Alias: WE, AI_WEDGE

Draws a three-dimensional wedge.

A	Specify the first corner of the wedge.

B	Specify the opposite corner of the wedge.

C	Specify the height of the wedge.

Center · <Corner of wedge> <0.0000,0.0000,0.0000>: To specify the first corner of the wedge, specify a point or enter the x,y,z-coordinates.

Cube · Length · <Opposite corner>: To dynamically draw the base of the wedge, the default setting, specify the opposite corner. To draw a cube, choose Cube. To specify the three dimensions of the wedge (length, width, height), choose Length.

Height of wedge: Specify a point or enter the height in drawing units.

To draw a cubic wedge

A	Specify the first corner of the wedge.

B	Specify the length of the sides of the wedge.

Choose Cube.

Length of sides of cubic wedge: Specify two points, or enter the length in drawing units. The wedge is drawn with equal length, width, and height measurements.

To specify the length

A	Specify the first corner of the wedge.

B	Specify the length.

C	Specify the width.

D	Specify the height.

Choose Length.

Length of side: Specify two points, or enter the length in drawing units.

Width of wedge: Specify two points, or enter the length in drawing units.

Height of wedge: Specify two points, or enter the length in drawing units.

  Command List


Window Tile Horizontally

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Window > Tile Horizontally

Keyboard: WHTILE

Horizontally tiles the open drawing windows.

  Command List


Window Icon Arrange

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: WIARRANGE

Arranges the minimized drawing windows so that the icons for all drawings are located at the lower left corner of the window.

  Command List


Window Open

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Window > New Window

Keyboard: WOPEN

Opens an additional window containing the current drawing.

  Command List


WMF Out

  How To	  Related Topics

Keyboard: WMFOUT

Alias: WO

Displays the Create Snapshot dialog box so you can export the active viewport to a Windows metafile (.wmf). To create a Windows metafile, click anywhere in the viewport that you want to create as a graphic, and then type the command. Go to the folder where you want the file created and name the file, From the Save As Type list, select Windows metafile (.wmf), and then click OK.

  Command List


Window Tile Vertically

  How To	  Related Topics

Menu: Window > Tile Vertically

Keyboard: WVTILE

Vertically tiles the open drawing windows.

  Command List


Explode

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Modify > Explode ( [image])

Keyboard: XPLODE

  Command List


External Reference

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: Tools > External Reference ( [image])

Menu: Tools > External Reference

Keyboard: XREF

Alias: XA, -XR, XATTACH

Temporarily adds external drawings to a current drawing, without changing their content. When you save the drawing, only the reference information is saved. The next time you open the drawing, the external reference is added again, allowing you to build a master drawing using component drawings. Any changes you make to a component drawing is reflected in the master drawing.

Xref: ? to list · Bind · Detach · Reload · Overlay · <Attach>: To include an external reference in the current drawing, choose Attach, the default setting. To display a list of all external references in the current drawing, choose ?. To convert an external reference to a block, choose Bind. To detach, or remove, an external reference, choose Detach. To reload an external reference to update the current drawing, choose Reload. To overlay an external reference, choose Overlay.

To attach an external reference

Choose Attach. The Select File to Attach dialog box appears so you can locate the external reference.

To convert an external reference to a block

The Bind command breaks the relationship between the external reference and your drawing. Binding an external reference causes the referenced drawing to become part of your drawing.

Choose Bind.

Xref(s) to bind: Enter the name of the external reference that you want to bind to the drawing.

To detach an external reference from the drawing

The detach command detaches the reference from the drawing to which it is currently attached. The next time you open that drawing, those references are not included.

Choose Detach.

Xref(s) to detach: Enter the name of the external reference that you want to remove from the drawing.

To overlay one drawing on top of another

Overlay allows you to lay a drawing on top of another drawing, similar to the way you work manually with transparencies. An overlay is also a reference until you bind it.

Choose Overlay. The Select File to Overlay dialog box appears.

  Command List


Zoom

  How To	  Related Topics

Toolbar: View > Zoom Window ( [image])

Menu: View > Zoom > Zoom

Keyboard: ZOOM

Alias: Z, RTZOOM

Enlarges or reduces the display of the active drawing. To examine a drawing more closely, you can zoom into it. Doing this makes the drawing appear larger on the screen so you can see more detail. When you zoom in or out, you enlarge or reduce the display in five-percent increments.

Zoom in.	Zoom out.
TIP If your mouse has a center wheel, you can use it to zoom in and out.

Zoom: In · Out · All · Center · Extents · Left · Previous · Right · Window · <Scale (nx)>: To specify the scale, enter the magnification value. To zoom in, choose In. To zoom out, choose Out. To display the entire drawing, choose All. To view a window defined by a center point and the magnification value or height, choose Center. To display the drawing extents, choose Extents. To view a window defined by the left point and the magnification value or height, choose Left. To return to the previous display, choose Previous. To view a window defined by the right point and the magnification value or height, choose Right. To view a window defined by specifying two (opposite) corners, choose Window.

To view a window by defining the center point and magnification or height

Current view showing the point to be centered in the new view (A) and the new view zoomed using a scale factor of 2x.

Choose Center.

Center of view <3.9958,-90.8158,0.0000>: To accept the current setting, press Enter. To use a different center, specify a point or enter a new value.

Enter zoom factor (nX/nXP), or view height <12.1193>: To accept the current view height, press Enter. To change the view height, specify a point. To select the zoom factor, enter a value.

To view a window by defining the left corner and magnification or height

Lower left corner: Specify a point or enter a new value.

Enter zoom factor (nX/nXP), or view height: To accept the current view height, press Enter. To change the view height, specify a point. To select the zoom factor, enter a value.

To view a window by defining the right corner and magnification or height

Upper right corner: Specify a point or enter a new value.

Enter zoom factor (nX/nXP), or view height: To accept the current view height, press Enter. To change the view height, specify a point. To select the zoom factor, enter a value.

To view a window by specifying two points

To specify a rectangular  window around the area you want to magnify, first select one corner (A) and then select the opposite corner (B)	Result.
Choose Window.

First corner: Specify the first corner of the window into which you want to zoom.

Opposite corner: Specify the opposite corner.

  Command List